Tektronix scope programmer`s manual
Programmer Manual
TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes
TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D Series
063-3002-00
Table of Contents
Command Groups.......................................................................................................................... 23
Acquisition Commands .................................................................................................................. 24
Alias Commands ............................................................................................................................ 25
Application Menu Commands ........................................................................................................ 26
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands.......................................................................................... 27
Cursor Commands......................................................................................................................... 28
Display Commands ........................................................................................................................ 29
File System Commands ................................................................................................................. 31
Hardcopy Commands .................................................................................................................... 32
Histogram Commands ................................................................................................................... 33
Horizontal Commands.................................................................................................................... 34
Limit Test Commands .................................................................................................................... 37
Mask Commands ........................................................................................................................... 38
Measurement Commands.............................................................................................................. 41
Miscellaneous Commands............................................................................................................. 45
RS-232 Commands ....................................................................................................................... 46
Save and Recall Commands ......................................................................................................... 47
Status and Error Commands ......................................................................................................... 48
Trigger Commands ........................................................................................................................ 49
Vertical Commands........................................................................................................................ 57
Waveform Commands ................................................................................................................... 59
Zoom Commands .......................................................................................................................... 65
Syntax ............................................................................................................................................ 66
Backus-Naur Grammar Overview.................................................................................................. 67
Command and Query Structure ..................................................................................................... 68
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope........................................................................................... 70
Argument Types............................................................................................................................. 71
Constructed Mnemonics ................................................................................................................ 73
Command Entry ............................................................................................................................. 76
ACQuire? ....................................................................................................................................... 78
ACQuire:AUTOSAve...................................................................................................................... 79
ACQuire:MODe .............................................................................................................................. 80
ACQuire:NUMACq? ....................................................................................................................... 82
ACQuire:NUMAVg ......................................................................................................................... 83
ACQuire:NUMEnv .......................................................................................................................... 84
ACQuire:STATE............................................................................................................................. 86
ACQuire:STOPAfter ....................................................................................................................... 87
ALIas .............................................................................................................................................. 88
ALIas:CATalog? ............................................................................................................................. 89
ALIas:DEFIne................................................................................................................................. 90
ALIas:DELEte................................................................................................................................. 91
ALIas:DELEte:ALL ......................................................................................................................... 92
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe...................................................................................................................... 93
ALIas:STATE ................................................................................................................................. 94
ALLEv?........................................................................................................................................... 95
ALLOcate? ..................................................................................................................................... 96
ALLOcate:WAVEform? .................................................................................................................. 97
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE? ....................................................................................................... 98
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>...................................................................................................... 99
APPMenu ..................................................................................................................................... 100
APPMenu:LABel........................................................................................................................... 101
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> .................................................................................................... 102
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x> ........................................................................................................ 103
APPMenu:TITLe........................................................................................................................... 104
AUTOSet...................................................................................................................................... 105
1
BELl.............................................................................................................................................. 106
BUSY?.......................................................................................................................................... 107
CAL? ............................................................................................................................................ 108
CH<x>? ........................................................................................................................................ 109
CH<x>:BANdwidth ....................................................................................................................... 110
CH<x>:COUPling ......................................................................................................................... 111
CH<x>:DESKew........................................................................................................................... 112
CH<x>:IMPedance....................................................................................................................... 113
CH<x>:OFFSet ............................................................................................................................ 114
CH<x>:POSition........................................................................................................................... 115
CH<x>:PROBE? .......................................................................................................................... 116
CH<x>:PROBECal? ..................................................................................................................... 117
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten:<NR3>........................................................................................ 118
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTBatten:<NR3>...................................................................................... 119
CH<x>:SCAle............................................................................................................................... 120
CH<x>:VOLts ............................................................................................................................... 121
CLEARMenu ................................................................................................................................ 122
*CLS............................................................................................................................................. 123
CURSor?...................................................................................................................................... 124
CURSor:FUNCtion ....................................................................................................................... 125
CURSor:HBArs? .......................................................................................................................... 126
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? .............................................................................................................. 127
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> .................................................................................................... 128
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt............................................................................................. 129
CURSor:HBArs:SELect................................................................................................................ 130
CURSor:HBArs:UNITS................................................................................................................. 131
CURSor:MODe ............................................................................................................................ 132
CURSor:PAIred............................................................................................................................ 133
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA............................................................................................................. 134
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1............................................................................................................... 135
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2............................................................................................................... 136
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>.................................................................................................... 137
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt ............................................................................................ 138
CURSor:PAIred:SELect ............................................................................................................... 139
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS ................................................................................................................ 140
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA............................................................................................................. 141
CURSor:VBArs............................................................................................................................. 142
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? .............................................................................................................. 143
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> .................................................................................................... 144
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt ............................................................................................. 145
CURSor:VBArs:SELect ................................................................................................................ 146
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS................................................................................................................. 147
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring? ...................................................................................................... 148
CURVe ......................................................................................................................................... 149
DATa ............................................................................................................................................ 150
DATa:DESTination....................................................................................................................... 151
DATa:ENCdg ............................................................................................................................... 152
DATa:SOUrce .............................................................................................................................. 154
DATa:STARt ................................................................................................................................ 155
DATa:STOP ................................................................................................................................. 156
DATa:TARget............................................................................................................................... 157
DATa:WIDth................................................................................................................................. 158
DATE............................................................................................................................................ 159
*DDT ............................................................................................................................................ 160
DELEte:SETUp ............................................................................................................................ 161
DELEte:WAVEform...................................................................................................................... 162
2
DESE ........................................................................................................................................... 163
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?..................................................................................................................... 164
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?...................................................................................................................... 165
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition ........................................................................................................... 166
DIAg:SELect:ALL ......................................................................................................................... 167
DIAg:SELect:CPU ........................................................................................................................ 168
DIAg:SELect:DISplay ................................................................................................................... 169
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel.................................................................................................................... 170
DIAg:STATE................................................................................................................................. 171
DISplay?....................................................................................................................................... 172
DISplay:CLOCk ............................................................................................................................ 173
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast.......................................................................................................... 174
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>:BYCONTents....................................................................... 175
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence ........................................................................................ 177
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<persistPalette>:P<x>.......................................................................... 178
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular ............................................................................................... 180
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:RESET ....................................................................... 182
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:<item name> .............................................................. 183
DISplay:FILTer ............................................................................................................................. 185
DISplay:FORMat .......................................................................................................................... 186
DISplay:GRAticule........................................................................................................................ 187
DISplay:INStavu:ACCUmulate ..................................................................................................... 188
DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright....................................................................................................... 189
DISplay:INStavu:BRIGHTness..................................................................................................... 190
DISplay:INStavu:CONTRast ........................................................................................................ 191
DISplay:INStavu:MAP .................................................................................................................. 192
DISplay:INStavu:PERCent:P<x>.................................................................................................. 193
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence..................................................................................................... 194
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist ........................................................................................................ 196
DISplay:INTENSITy?.................................................................................................................... 197
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast................................................................................................... 198
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERALL .................................................................................................... 199
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt ............................................................................................................ 200
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform .................................................................................................. 201
DISplay:MODe ............................................................................................................................. 202
DISplay:PERSistence................................................................................................................... 203
DISplay:STYle .............................................................................................................................. 204
DISplay:TRIGBar ......................................................................................................................... 205
DISplay:TRIGT ............................................................................................................................. 206
*ESE............................................................................................................................................. 207
*ESR? .......................................................................................................................................... 208
EVENT? ....................................................................................................................................... 209
EVMsg?........................................................................................................................................ 210
EVQty? ......................................................................................................................................... 211
FACtory ........................................................................................................................................ 212
FILESystem:COPy ....................................................................................................................... 213
FILESystem:CWD........................................................................................................................ 214
FILESystem:DELEte .................................................................................................................... 215
FILESystem:DELWarn................................................................................................................. 216
FILESystem:DIR .......................................................................................................................... 217
FILESystem:FORMat ................................................................................................................... 218
FILESystem:FREESpace............................................................................................................. 219
FILESystem:MKDir....................................................................................................................... 220
FILESystem:OVERWrite.............................................................................................................. 221
FILESystem:PRInt........................................................................................................................ 222
FILESystem:READFile................................................................................................................. 223
3
FILESystem:REName .................................................................................................................. 224
FILESystem:RMDir ...................................................................................................................... 225
FILESystem:WRITEFile ............................................................................................................... 226
HARDCopy................................................................................................................................... 227
HARDCopy:FILEName ................................................................................................................ 228
HARDCopy:FORMat .................................................................................................................... 229
HARDCopy:LAYout ...................................................................................................................... 230
HARDCopy:PALEtte..................................................................................................................... 231
HARDCopy:PORT........................................................................................................................ 232
HDR ............................................................................................................................................. 233
HEADer ........................................................................................................................................ 234
HIStogram? .................................................................................................................................. 235
HIStogram:BOX ........................................................................................................................... 236
HIStogram:BOXPcnt .................................................................................................................... 237
HIStogram:COUNt ....................................................................................................................... 238
HIStogram:DISplay ...................................................................................................................... 239
HIStogram:MODe......................................................................................................................... 240
HIStogram:SIZe ........................................................................................................................... 241
HIStogram:SOUrce ...................................................................................................................... 242
HORizontal? ................................................................................................................................. 243
HORizontal:ACQDURATION? ..................................................................................................... 244
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH? ......................................................................................................... 245
might return: 500. ........................................................................................................................ 245
HORizontal:CLOck....................................................................................................................... 246
enables the internal clocks........................................................................................................... 246
HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate ...................................................................................................... 247
sets the maximum external clock rate to 50 clocks per second. ................................................. 247
HORizontal:DELay? ..................................................................................................................... 248
HORizontal:DELay:MODe............................................................................................................ 249
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle ............................................................................................................ 250
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv .......................................................................................................... 251
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe .............................................................................................................. 252
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter ........................................................................................... 253
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter............................................................................................. 254
HORizontal:EXTDACQ ................................................................................................................ 255
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt................................................................................................... 256
HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock .......................................................................................... 257
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth .................................................................................................. 258
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition ................................................................................................ 259
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF ....................................................................................................... 260
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE................................................................................................... 261
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen?........................................................................ 262
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:CLEARSNapshot .............................................................. 263
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa? ............................................................................. 264
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAme?............................................................................ 265
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:POSition? .......................................................................... 266
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF? ................................................................................. 267
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SNAPShot ......................................................................... 268
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:STATE .............................................................................. 269
HORizontal:FITtoscreen............................................................................................................... 270
HORizontal:MAIn?........................................................................................................................ 271
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle .............................................................................................................. 272
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv............................................................................................................. 273
HORizontal:MODe ....................................................................................................................... 274
HORizontal:POSition.................................................................................................................... 275
HORizontal:RECOrdlength .......................................................................................................... 276
4
HORizontal:RECORDSTART ...................................................................................................... 277
HORizontal:ROLL ........................................................................................................................ 278
HORizontal:SCAle........................................................................................................................ 279
HORizontal:SECdiv ...................................................................................................................... 280
HORizontal:TRIGger? .................................................................................................................. 281
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition..................................................................................................... 282
ID?................................................................................................................................................ 283
*IDN?............................................................................................................................................ 284
LIMit:BELl ..................................................................................................................................... 285
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>................................................................................................................. 286
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>............................................................................................................ 287
LIMit:HARDCopy.......................................................................................................................... 288
LIMit:STATE................................................................................................................................. 289
LIMit:TEMPLate ........................................................................................................................... 290
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination ...................................................................................................... 291
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce.............................................................................................................. 292
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal ..................................................................................... 293
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical ........................................................................................ 294
LOCk ............................................................................................................................................ 295
*LRN?........................................................................................................................................... 296
MASK? ......................................................................................................................................... 297
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe ............................................................................................................... 298
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj ...................................................................................................... 299
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard......................................................................................................... 300
MASK:COUNt .............................................................................................................................. 304
MASK:COUNt:STATE.................................................................................................................. 305
MASK:COUNt:TOTal? ................................................................................................................. 306
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?.................................................................................................... 307
MASK:DISplay.............................................................................................................................. 308
MASK:FILTer ............................................................................................................................... 309
MASK:INVert................................................................................................................................ 310
MASK:MARgin:PERCent ............................................................................................................. 311
MASK:MARgin:STATE................................................................................................................. 312
MASK:MASK<x> .......................................................................................................................... 313
11.400000000E+0,12.531328321E+0,8.820e+01,1.253e+01,8.840e+01,0.0 ........ 313
E+0,1.120e+01,0.0E+0.......................................................................................................... 313
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNt? ........................................................................................................... 314
MASK:MASK<x>:NR_Pt? ............................................................................................................ 315
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTS ........................................................................................................... 316
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt .................................................................................................... 317
MASK:PASSFail:BELl .................................................................................................................. 318
MASK:PASSFail:STATE .............................................................................................................. 319
MASK:PASSFail:STATUs? .......................................................................................................... 320
MASK:PASSFail:THReshold........................................................................................................ 321
MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform........................................................................................................ 322
MASK:SOUrce ............................................................................................................................. 323
MASK:STANdard ......................................................................................................................... 324
MASK:TBPosition......................................................................................................................... 328
MATH<x>? ................................................................................................................................... 329
MATH<x>:DEFIne........................................................................................................................ 330
MATH<x>:NUMAVg ..................................................................................................................... 332
MATH<x>:PROCessing ............................................................................................................... 333
MEASUrement? ........................................................................................................................... 334
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot ................................................................................................ 335
MEASUrement:GATing ................................................................................................................ 336
MEASUrement:IMMed? ............................................................................................................... 337
5
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? ................................................................................................... 338
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction .................................................................................... 339
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1 ........................................................................................ 340
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 ........................................................................................ 341
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]............................................................................................. 342
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2............................................................................................... 343
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe ....................................................................................................... 344
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS? ................................................................................................... 346
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? ................................................................................................... 347
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? .......................................................................................................... 348
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? ............................................................................................. 349
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? .............................................................................................. 350
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction ............................................................................... 351
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1 ................................................................................... 352
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 ................................................................................... 353
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? ........................................................................................ 354
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?............................................................................................... 355
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? ......................................................................................... 356
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]........................................................................................ 357
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2.......................................................................................... 358
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE ............................................................................................... 359
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? ............................................................................................ 360
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe .................................................................................................. 361
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS? .............................................................................................. 363
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? .............................................................................................. 364
MEASUrement:METHod .............................................................................................................. 365
MEASUrement:REFLevel? .......................................................................................................... 366
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH .................................................................................. 367
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW ................................................................................... 368
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID..................................................................................... 369
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2................................................................................... 370
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod ............................................................................................. 371
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH .................................................................................. 372
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW ................................................................................... 373
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID..................................................................................... 374
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2................................................................................... 375
MEASUrement:SNAPShot ........................................................................................................... 376
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE............................................................................................... 377
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting......................................................................................... 378
MESSage ..................................................................................................................................... 379
MESSage:BOX ............................................................................................................................ 380
MESSage:SHOW......................................................................................................................... 381
MESSage:STATE ........................................................................................................................ 382
NEWpass ..................................................................................................................................... 383
*OPC ............................................................................................................................................ 384
*OPT? .......................................................................................................................................... 385
PASSWord................................................................................................................................... 386
*PSC ............................................................................................................................................ 387
*PUD ............................................................................................................................................ 388
*RCL............................................................................................................................................. 389
RECAll:ACQDATA ....................................................................................................................... 390
RECAll:IMAGEHistogram............................................................................................................. 391
RECAll:SETUp ............................................................................................................................. 392
RECAll:WAVEform....................................................................................................................... 393
REM ............................................................................................................................................. 394
*RST............................................................................................................................................. 395
6
RS232? ........................................................................................................................................ 396
RS232:BAUd................................................................................................................................ 397
RS232:HARDFlagging ................................................................................................................. 398
RS232:PARity .............................................................................................................................. 399
RS232:SOFTFlagging.................................................................................................................. 400
RS232:STOPBits ......................................................................................................................... 401
*SAV............................................................................................................................................. 402
SAVe:ACQDATA.......................................................................................................................... 403
SAVe:IMAGEHistogram ............................................................................................................... 404
SAVe:SETUp ............................................................................................................................... 405
SAVe:WAVEform ......................................................................................................................... 406
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat..................................................................................................... 407
SELect?........................................................................................................................................ 408
SELect:<wfm>.............................................................................................................................. 409
SELect:CONTROl ........................................................................................................................ 410
SET? ............................................................................................................................................ 411
*SRE ............................................................................................................................................ 412
*STB?........................................................................................................................................... 413
TEKSecure................................................................................................................................... 414
TIMe ............................................................................................................................................. 415
TRIGger ....................................................................................................................................... 416
TRIGger:DELay............................................................................................................................ 417
TRIGger:DELay:BY...................................................................................................................... 418
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE? .............................................................................................................. 419
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling ............................................................................................... 420
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce................................................................................................... 422
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS? .......................................................................................................... 423
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt................................................................................................ 424
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel ................................................................................................................. 425
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe .................................................................................................................. 426
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe.................................................................................................................. 427
TRIGger:MAIn .............................................................................................................................. 428
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm ...................................................................... 429
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH............................................................... 430
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW ............................................................... 431
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate..................................................................................... 432
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm ...................................................................... 433
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe ........................................................................................ 434
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm ..................................................................... 435
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce ..................................................................................... 437
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard ................................................................................. 438
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?................................................................................................................. 440
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling.................................................................................................. 441
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe....................................................................................................... 442
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce..................................................................................................... 443
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff? ............................................................................................................ 444
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal? .............................................................................................. 445
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY ........................................................................................................ 446
sets the holdoff to the by time setting. This enables the user to set the holdoff time. ................. 446
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe..................................................................................................... 447
sets the holdoff time to be 10 seconds. ....................................................................................... 447
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue .................................................................................................. 448
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel ................................................................................................................... 449
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc? ................................................................................................................ 450
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss....................................................................................................... 451
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion.................................................................................................. 452
7
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut? ...................................................................................................... 453
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> ............................................................................................ 454
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 .................................................................................. 455
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn......................................................................................... 456
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit....................................................................... 457
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit ..................................................................... 458
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE ........................................................................... 459
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel............................................................................ 460
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce ........................................................................ 461
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel .............................................................................. 462
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce ........................................................................... 463
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime................................................................................ 464
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime................................................................................... 465
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4.................................................................................... 466
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn .......................................................................................... 467
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold? ............................................................................................. 468
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> ................................................................................... 469
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn....................................................................................................... 470
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe................................................................................................................... 471
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse? ................................................................................................................ 472
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss ...................................................................................................... 473
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch? .................................................................................................... 474
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer........................................................................................... 475
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity........................................................................................ 476
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth ........................................................................................... 477
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT? ..................................................................................................... 478
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity ........................................................................................ 479
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? .................................................................................. 480
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh ......................................................................... 481
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH .......................................................................... 482
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW........................................................................... 483
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn ........................................................................................... 484
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth............................................................................................ 485
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime .......................................................................... 486
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity ................................................................................ 487
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEWRate? .......................................................................... 488
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh.................................................................. 489
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH .................................................................. 490
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW................................................................... 491
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn.................................................................................... 492
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce .................................................................................................... 493
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity.................................................................................... 494
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe ......................................................................................... 495
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? ..................................................................................................... 496
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit ..................................................................................... 497
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit...................................................................................... 498
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity ........................................................................................ 499
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn ........................................................................................... 500
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe .................................................................................................................... 501
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? ................................................................................................................. 502
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY ............................................................................................................. 503
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD........................................................................................................ 504
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType................................................................................................ 505
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?............................................................................................. 506
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE.......................................................................... 507
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS ................................................................................. 508
8
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES ................................................................................... 509
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSynchwidth ................................................................... 510
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime ......................................................................... 511
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime......................................................................... 512
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime ......................................................................... 513
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime......................................................................... 514
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv......................................................................................................... 515
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff? .................................................................................................. 516
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue......................................................................................... 517
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce............................................................................................... 518
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE .......................................................................................................... 519
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES........................................................................................................ 520
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc ......................................................................................................... 521
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL ........................................................................................................... 522
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN ........................................................................................................ 523
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod.............................................................................................. 524
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce ..................................................................................................... 525
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard ................................................................................................. 526
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc......................................................................................................... 527
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem..................................................................................................... 528
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe.......................................................................................................... 529
TRIGger STATE?......................................................................................................................... 530
*TRG ............................................................................................................................................ 531
*TST? ........................................................................................................................................... 532
UNLock ........................................................................................................................................ 533
VERBose...................................................................................................................................... 534
*WAI............................................................................................................................................. 535
WAVFrm? .................................................................................................................................... 536
WFMPre?..................................................................................................................................... 537
WFMPre:BIT_Nr .......................................................................................................................... 538
WFMPre:BN_Fmt......................................................................................................................... 539
WFMPre:BYT_Nr ......................................................................................................................... 540
WFMPre:BYT_Or......................................................................................................................... 541
WFMPre:ENCdg .......................................................................................................................... 542
WFMPre:PT_Fmt......................................................................................................................... 543
WFMPre:PT_Off .......................................................................................................................... 544
WFMPre:XINcr............................................................................................................................. 545
WFMPre:YMUlt ............................................................................................................................ 546
WFMPre:YOFf ............................................................................................................................. 547
WFMPre:YZEro............................................................................................................................ 548
WFMPre:<wfm>? ......................................................................................................................... 549
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt ............................................................................................................... 550
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt ............................................................................................................. 551
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off .............................................................................................................. 552
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId ................................................................................................................. 553
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr ................................................................................................................. 554
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit................................................................................................................. 555
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro................................................................................................................ 556
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt ................................................................................................................ 557
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf.................................................................................................................. 558
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit................................................................................................................. 559
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro................................................................................................................ 560
ZOOm .......................................................................................................................................... 561
ZOOm:DUAl ................................................................................................................................. 562
Example 2: ZOOM:DUAL? returns either 0 or 1 depending on the state of the Dual Zoom mode.
..................................................................................................................................................... 562
9
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet ................................................................................................................... 563
ZOOm:GRAticule ......................................................................................................................... 564
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk............................................................................................................. 565
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition........................................................................................................ 566
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle............................................................................................................ 567
ZOOm:STATE.............................................................................................................................. 568
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition ........................................................................................................... 569
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle ............................................................................................................... 570
Example Programs ...................................................................................................................... 571
Example Software Overview ........................................................................................................ 572
The example software includes: .................................................................................................. 572
Compiling the Example Software ................................................................................................. 573
Compiling and Linking QuickC Programs .................................................................................... 574
Compiling and Linking QuickBASIC Programs ............................................................................ 576
Status and Events ........................................................................................................................ 577
Registers ...................................................................................................................................... 578
Queues......................................................................................................................................... 582
Messages..................................................................................................................................... 583
Event Handling Sequence............................................................................................................ 589
Synchronization Methods ............................................................................................................. 590
Appendices .................................................................................................................................. 595
Appendix A: Reserved Words...................................................................................................... 596
Appendix B: Interface Specifications............................................................................................ 606
Appendix C: Factory Initialization Settings ................................................................................... 608
10
Tektronix TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes
Programmer Manual
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D Series)
063-3002-00
The following Help Topics are available:
Command Groups
Alphabetic Command List
Status and Events
Syntax
Example Programs
Appendices
For Help on Help, Press F1
Copyright (C) 1998, Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.
Tektronix, Inc. P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR. 97070-1000
Tektronix, Tek, and InstaVu are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
11
Alphabetic Command List
Command Descriptions
You can use commands to either set instrument features or query instrument values. You can use
some commands to do both, some to only set, and some to only query. This manual marks set
only commands with the words "No Query Form" following the command name. It marks query
only commands with a question mark appended to the header, and includes the words "Query
Only" following the command name.
This help file spells out headers, mnemonics, and arguments with the minimal spelling shown in
upper case. For example, to use the abbreviated form of the ACQuire:MODe command, just type
ACQ:MOD.
ACQuire?
ACQuire:AUTOSAve
ACQuire:MODe
ACQuire:NUMACq?
ACQuire:NUMAVg
ACQuire:NUMEnv
ACQuire:REPEt
ACQuire:STATE
ACQuire:STOPAfter
ALIas
ALIas:CATalog?
ALIas:DEFIne
ALIas:DELEte
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
ALIas:STATE
ALLEv?
ALLOcate?
ALLOcate:WAVEform?
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>
APPMenu
APPMenu:LABel
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>
APPMenu:TITLe
AUTOSet
BELl
BUSY?
*CAL?
CH<x>?
CH<x>:BANdwidth
CH<x>:COUPling
CH<x>:DESKew
CH<x>:IMPedance
12
CH<x>:OFFSet
CH<x>:POSition
CH<x>:PROBE?
CH<x>:PROBECal?
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTBatten
CH<x>:SCAle
CH<x>:VOLts
CLEARMenu
*CLS
CURSor?
CURSor:FUNCtion
CURSor:HBArs?
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
CURSor:HBArs:SELect
CURSor:HBArs:UNITS
CURSor:MODe
CURSor:PAIred
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt
CURSor:PAIred:SELect
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
CURSor:VBArs
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
CURSor:VBArs:SELect
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?
CURVe
DATa
DATa:DESTination
DATa:ENCdg
DATa:SOUrce
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
DATa:TARget
DATa:WIDth
DATE
*DDT
DELEte:SETUp
13
DELEte:WAVEform
DESE
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition
DIAg:SELect:ALL
DIAg:SELect:CPU
DIAg:SELect:DISplay
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel
DIAg:STATE
DISplay?
DISplay:CLOCk
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>:BYCONTents
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>:TO
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:RESET
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:<item name>
DISplay:FILTer
DISplay:FORMat
DISplay:GRAticule
DISplay:INStavu:ACCUmulate
DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright
DISplay:INStavu:BRIGHTness
DISplay:INStavu:CONTRAast
DISplay:INStavu:MAP
DISplay:INStavu:PERCent
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence
DISplay:INStavu:STYle
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist
DISplay:INTENSITy?
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
DISplay:MODe
DISplay:PERSistence
DISplay:STYle
DISplay:TRIGBar
DISplay:TRIGT
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
EVQty?
14
FACtory
FILESystem:COPy
FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:DELEte
FILESystem:DELWarn
FILESystem:DIR
FILESystem:FORMat
FILESystem:FREESpace
FILESystem:MKDir
FILESystem:OVERWrite
FILESystem:PRint
FILESystem:READFile
FILESystem:REName
FILESystem:RMDir
FILESystem:WRITEFile
HARDCopy
HARDCopy:FILEName
HARDCopy:FORMat
HARDCopy:LAYout
HARDCopy:PALEtte
HARDCopy:PORT
HDR
HEADer
HIStogram?
HIStogram:BOX
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
HIStogram:COUNt
HIStogram:DISplay
HIStogram:MODe
HIStogram:SIZe
HIStogram:SOUrce
HORizontal?
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
HORizontal:CLOck
HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate
HORizontal:DELay?
HORizontal:DELay:MODe
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter
HORizontal:EXTDACQ
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition
15
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:CLEARSNapshot
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAME
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:POSition
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SNAPShot
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:STATE
HORizontal:FITtoscreen
HORizontal:MAIn?
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
HORizontal:MODe
HORizontal:POSition
HORizontal:RECORDLength
HORizontal:RECORDSTART
HORizontal:ROLL
HORizontal:SCAle
HORizontal:SECdiv
HORizontal:TRIGger?
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
ID?
*IDN?
LIMit:BELl
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>
LIMit:HARDCopy
LIMit:STATE
LIMit:TEMPLate
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
LOCk
*LRN?
MASK?
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard
MASK:COUNt
MASK:COUNt:STATE
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?
MASK:DISplay
MASK:FILTer
16
MASK:INVert
MASK:MARgin:PERCent
MASK:MARgin:STATE
MASK:MASK<x>
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT?
MASK:MASK<x>NR Pt?
MASK:MASK<x>:POInts
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt
MASK:PASSFail:BELl
MASK:PASSFail:STATE
MASK:PASSFail:STATUs?
MASK:PASSFail:THReshold
MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform
MASK:SOUrce
MASK:STANdard
MASK:TBPosition
MATH<x>?
MATH<x>:DEFIne
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
MATH<x>:PROCessing
MEASUrement?
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
MEASUrement:GATing
MEASUrement:IMMed?
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS?
17
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
MEASUrement:METHod
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
MESSage
MESSage:BOX
MESSage:SHOW
MESSage:STATE
NEWpass
*OPC
*OPT?
PASSWord
*PSC
*PUD
*RCL
RECAll:ACQDATA
RECAll:IMAGEHistogram
RECAll:SETUp
RECAll:WAVEform
REM
*RST
RS232:BAUd
RS232:HARDFlagging
RS232:PARity
RS232:SOFTFlagging
RS232:STOPBits
RS232?
*SAV
SAVe:ACQDATA
SAVe:IMAGEHistogram
SAVe:SETUp
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SELect?
SELect:<wfm>
18
SELect:CONTROl
SET?
*SRE
*STB?
TEKSecure
TIMe
TRIGger
TRIGger:DELay
TRIGger:DELay:BY
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe
TRIGger:MAIn
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal?
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CH<x>
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
19
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEWRate?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE
20
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSynchwidth
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff?
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe
TRIGger:STATE?
*TRG
*TST?
UNLock
VERBose
*WAI
WAVFrm?
WFMPre?
WFMPre:BIT_Nr
WFMPre:BN_Fmt
WFMPre:BYT_Nr
WFMPre:BYT_Or
WFMPre:ENCdg
WFMPre:PT_Fmt
WFMPre:PT_Off
WFMPre:XINcr
WFMPre:YMUlt
WFMPre:YOFf
WFMPre:YZEro
WFMPre:<wfm>?
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr
21
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
ZOOm
ZOOm:DUAl
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet
ZOOm:GRAticle
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle
ZOOm:STATE
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle
22
Command Groups
This section lists oscilloscope commands by functional groups.
The oscilloscope GPIB interface conforms to Tektronix standard
codes and formats and IEEE Std 488.2-1987 except where noted.
Acquisition Commands
Alias Commands
Application Menu Commands
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
Cursor Commands
Display Commands
File System Commands
Hardcopy Commands
Histogram Commands
Horizontal Commands
Limit Test Commands
Mask Commands
Measurement Commands
Miscellaneous Commands
RS-232 Commands
Save and Recall Commands
Status and Error Commands
Trigger Commands
Vertical Commands
Waveform Commands
Zoom Commands
23
Acquisition Commands
Acquisition commands affect waveform acquisition. These commands control mode, averaging,
enveloping, and single-waveform acquisition. (Persistence controls are in the Display Commands
section). Table 2-4 lists these commands.
Table 2-4: Acquisition Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return acquisition parameters
ACQuire?
Save waveforms to reference memory
ACQuire:AUTOSAve
(TDS 500D, 600B, 700D)
Acquisition mode
ACQuire:MODe
Return # of acquisitions obtained
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Number of acquisitions for average
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Number of acquisitions for envelope
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Repetitive acquisition mode
ACQuire:REPet
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 700D)
Start or stop acquisition system
ACQuire:STATE
Acquisition control
ACQuire:STOPAfter
24
Alias Commands
Alias commands let you define your own commands as a sequence of standard commands. This
is useful when you use the same commands each time you perform a certain task, such as
setting up measurements. Table 2-5 lists these commands.
Table 2-5: Alias Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Turn the alias state on and off
ALIas
Return a list of aliases
ALIas:CATalog?
Create a new alias
ALIas:DEFIne
Remove an alias
ALIas:DELEte
Remove all aliases
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Remove a named alias
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Turn the alias state on and off
ALIas:STATE
25
Application Menu Commands
Application menu commands let you define special-purpose menus. You can define labels for the
main and side menus as well as a side menu title. You can display an Application menu by either
pressing the front-panel APPLICATION button or sending the APPMenu ACTivate command.
Table 2-6 lists these commands.
When the oscilloscope displays an Application menu and a user presses a front-panel button, the
oscilloscope generates an event that tells the controller which button the user pressed. You can
also set up the event reporting system so that it generates a Service Request when a user
presses a menu button.
Table 2-6: Application Menu Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Display the application menu
APPMenu
Return or remove all application menu button
APPMenu:LABel
labels
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> Label for a bottom menu button
Label for a side menu button
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>
Create a title for the application menu
APPMenu:TITLe
26
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you start the self-calibration and diagnostic routines that
are built into the oscilloscope. The diagnostic test operation includes selecting the test sequence,
executing the sequence, and viewing the results. Table 2-7 lists these commands.
Table 2-7: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Perform an internal self-calibration
*CAL?
Return diagnostic tests status
DIAg:RESULt:FLAg?
Return diagnostic test sequence results
DIAg:RESULt:LOG?
Acquisition system diagnostic test sequence
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition
Diagnostic test sequence for Acquisition,
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Processor, Display, and Front panel
Processor diagnostic test sequence
DIAg:SELect:CPU
Display system diagnostic test sequence
DIAg:SELect:DISplay
Front panel diagnostic test sequence
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel
Control of diagnostic tests
DIAg:STATE
27
Cursor Commands
Cursor commands provide control over cursor (caliper) display and readout. Table 2-8 lists these
commands.
Cursor Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return cursor settings
CURSor?
Cursors on or off; select cursor type
CURSor:FUNCtion
Return H bar settings
CURSor:HBArs?
Return distance between H bars
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> Position a horizontal cursor
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Pcnt
Position a horizontal cursor in units of % of
vertical range. (TDS 400A Only)
Set which cursor the knob controls
CURSor:HBArs:SELect
Set H bar units
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
Set cursor tracking mode
CURSor:MODe
Position paired cursors; also, return settings
CURSor:PAIred
Return horizontal distance between 1st and
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
2nd paired cursors
Return horizontal position of 1st paired cursor
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?
Return horizontal position of 2nd paired
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2?
cursor
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
Set or return vbar position of the 1st or 2nd
paired cursor
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
Pcnt
Position the horizontal paired cursor in units
of % of record length (TDS 400A Only)
Select active paired cursor
CURSor:PAIred:SELect
Set paired cursor units
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS
Return vertical distance between 1st and 2nd
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
paired cursors
Position vertical bar cursors
CURSor:VBArs
Return horizontal distance between cursors
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> Position a vertical cursor
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Pcnt
Position a vertical cursor in units of % of
record length (TDS 400A Only)
Set which cursor the knob controls
CURSor:VBArs:SELect
Set vertical cursors to period or frequency or
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
to lines with option 05 video on the
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D
Return unit string for the vertical bar cursor
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?
(TDS 400A Only)
28
Display Commands
Display commands let you change the graticule style, change the displayed intensities, display
messages, and clear the menu. Table 2-9 lists these commands.
Table 2-9: Display Commands
====================================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Clear menus from display
CLEARMenu
Return display settings
DISplay?
Control the display of the date/time
DISplay:CLOCk
stamp
Control collision contrast (TDS 6X4B
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast
& 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item_n
ame>:BYCONTents
Set color for math or ref waveform to
the color of the waveform content
(TDS 6X4BA & 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item_n
ame>:TO
Set color for math or ref waveform to
specific color index (TDS 6X4B &
700D)
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PER
Sistence
Set current persistence palette to a
preset persistence palette (TDS 6X4B
& 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REG
ular
Set current palette to a preset palette
(TDS 6X4B & 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RES
ETALL
Reset all palettes to their factory
default settings (TDS 6X4B & 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<pal
ette_name>:RESET
Reset a selected palette to its factory
default settings (TDS 6X4B & 700D)
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<pal
ette_name>:<item_name>
Set the color of a selected item on a
selected palette (TDS 6X4B & 700D)
Displayed data interpolation
DISplay:FILTer
YT, XY, or XYZ display
DISplay:FORMat
Graticule style
DISplay:GRAticule
Set automatic DPO brightness on or
DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright
off (TDS 500D & 700D)
DISplaly:INStavu:BRIGHTnes
s
Set the DPO brightness level
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Set the DPO contrast level
DISplaly:INStavu:CONTRast
(TDS 500D & 700D)
DISplaly:INStavu:ACCUmulat
e
Set the accumulation depth for DPO,
mask counting, and histograms
29
DISplaly:INStavu:MAP
DISplaly:INStavu:PERCent:P
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Select intensity or percentages to map
display indexes to the acquisition
database
Control the maximum value for a color
index in the percent mapping mode
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence
DISplay:INStavu:STYle
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist
DISplay:INTENSITy?
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRa
st
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAL
L
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEfor
m
DISplay:MODe
DISplay:PERSistence
DISplay:STYle
DISplay:TRIGBar
DISplay:TRIGT
MESSage
MESSage:BOX
MESSage:SHOw
MESSage:STATE
Set DPO persistence type - variable,
infinite, or no persistence (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Set DPO waveform dots or vector
style (TDS 500D & 700D)
Set DPO variable persistence decay
time (TDS 500D & 700D)
Return intensity settings
Set waveform intensified zone
brightness (TDS 4X0A, 510A, 500D,
& 6X0B)
Set main brightness (TDS 4X0A,
510A, 500D, & 6X0B)
Set text brightness
Set waveform brightness
Set normal or DPO display mode
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Set variable persistence decay time
Waveform dots, vector, infinite
persistence, or variable persistence
Control the display of the trigger bar/s
on screen
Control the display of the trigger
indicator on screen
Remove text from the message
window
Set size and location of message
window
Remove and display text in the
message window
Control display of message window
30
File System Commands
File system commands help you use the built-in 3.5 inch floppy disk drive (available with the File
System). Table 2-10 lists these commands.
Table 2-10: File System Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Copy file to new file
FILESystem:COPy
Set directory path
FILESystem:CWd
Delete named file
FILESystem:DELEte
Set front-panel delete warning
FILESystem:DELWarn
FILESystem:DIR
Make directory
Format named drive
FILESystem:FORMat
Return free space on current drive
FILESystem:FREESpace
Make new directory
FILESystem:MKDir
Set file-overwrite protection
FILESystem:OVERWrite
Print file to port
FILESystem:PRint
Copy from file to GPIB port (TDS 500D &
FILESystem:READFile
700D)
Assign new name to file
FILESystem:REName
Delete named directory
FILESystem:RMDir
Copy from GPIB port to file (TDS 500D &
FILESystem:WRITEFile
700D)
31
Hardcopy Commands
Hardcopy commands let you control the format of hardcopy output and the initiation and
termination of hardcopies. Table 2-11 lists these commands.
Table 2-11: Hardcopy Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Start or terminate hardcopy
HARDCopy
Select file to send hardcopy
HARDCopy:FILEName
data to (File System Only)
Hardcopy output format
HARDCopy:FORMat
Hardcopy orientation
HARDCopy:LAYout
Select palette to use when
HARDCopy:PALEtte
making hardcopy
(TDS 6X4B & 700D)
Hardcopy port for output
HARDCopy:PORT
32
Histogram Commands
Histogram Commands let you select the type of histogram, what part of the waveform should go
into the histogram, and histogram statistics. Table 2-12 lists these commands.
Table 2-12: Histogram Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Queries the state of all
HIStogram?
settable parameters related
to histograms (TDS 500D &
700D)
Defines the left, top, right,
HIStogram:BOX
and bottom positions of the
histogram box, in source
waveform coordinates
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Define the left, top, right,
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
and bottom positions of the
histogram box, in
percentage coordinates
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Zeros the counts for
HIStogram:COUNt
histograms and starts
recounting (TDS 500D &
700D)
Selects the way the
HIStogram:DISplay
histogram is displayed, if at
all (TDS 500D & 700D)
Selects the type of
HIStogram:MODe
histogram to be made - or
turn the histogram off
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Controls the width (or
HIStogram:SIZe
height) of the histogram on
the screen (TDS 500D &
700D)
Selects which trace to use
HIStogram:SOUrce
when histograms are turned
on (TDS 500D & 700D)
33
Horizontal Commands
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the oscilloscope. You can set the time per division
(or time per point) of both the main and delay time bases. You can also set the record lengths.
Table 2-13 lists these commands.
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This provides program
compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Table 2-13: Horizontal Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return horizontal settings
HORizontal?
Returns the overall time
HORizontal:ACQDURACTION?
interval covered by the live
channels (TDS 500D &
700D)
Returns the acquisition
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
length - either the extended
one when extended
acquisition length mode is on
or the record length when
this mode is off (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Enable internal or external
HORizontal:CLOck
clocks (TDS 400A)
Set maximum external clock
HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate
rate (TDS 400A)
Return delay time base
HORizontal:DELay?
settings
Delay time base mode
HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Delay time base time per
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
division
Same as
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
Delay time
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Time to wait in delay-runsHORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter
after-main mode
Time to wait in delay-runsHORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter
after-trigger mode
Enable or disable extended
HORizontal:EXTDACQ
acquisition length mode
when DPO mode is not on.
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Select FastFrame count
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Turns Frame Lock on or off
HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock
Select length of each
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
FastFrame frame
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Select FastFrame frame to
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition
display (TDS 500D & 700D)
34
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
Select the reference frame
number
Setup FastFrame acquisition
(TDS 500D & 700D)
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:S
TATE
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:P
OSition?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
REF?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:F
RAME?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
DELTa?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:B
ETWeen?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:S
NAPShot
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
CLEARSNapshot
HORizontal:FITtoscreen
HORizontal:MAIn?
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
HORizontal:MODe
HORizontal:POSition
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
HORizontal:RECORDSTART
Returns the absolute trigger
date and time for the position
frame
Returns the absolute trigger
date and time for the
reference frame
Returns the time stamp for
the given frame number
Returns the relative time
between the triggers of the
reference and position
frames
Returns the relative time
between the triggers of the
two specified frames
Displays the TimeStamp
Snapshot list and overlay
menu
Clears the TimeStamp
Snapshot list and overlay
menu from the display
Setup waveform compress
Return main time per
division
Main time base time per
division
Same as
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Turn delay time base on or
off
Portion of waveform to
display
Number of points in
waveform record
Set the selected channel’s
record start that is used in
extended acquisition length
mode. Record start controls
where, in the extended
35
HORizontal:ROLL
HORizontal:SCAle
HORizontal:SECdiv
HORizontal:TRIGger?
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
acquisition, the displayed
waveform starts (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Set roll mode to auto or off
(TDS 400A)
Same as
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Same as
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Return trigger position
Main time base trigger
position
36
Limit Test Commands
The Limit Test commands let you automatically compare each incoming waveform against a
template waveform. You set an envelope of limits around a waveform and let the oscilloscope find
the waveforms that fall outside those limits. When the oscilloscope finds such a waveform, it can
generate a hardcopy, ring a bell, stop and wait for your input, or do any combination of these
actions. Table 2-14 lists these commands.
Table 2-14: Limit Test Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ring bell when limit is
LIMit:BELl
exceeded
Template to compare
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
waveform to
Template to compare math
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>
waveform to (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Make hardcopy when limit
LIMit:HARDCopy
exceeded
Turn limit testing on or off
LIMit:STATE
Template to compare
LIMit:TEMPLate
waveform to
Reference storage for
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
template waveform
Template waveform source
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:H
ORizontal
Tested waveform horizontal
tolerance
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:V
ERTical
Tested waveform vertical
tolerance
37
Mask Commands
Mask commands control standard masks, user-defined masks, and testing against masks. A
mask is a polygonal region on the screen. Every vertical line on the screen must intersect the
polygon in zero, one, or two places, but never in more than two. You must break up more
complicated polygons into separate masks. Unlike Limit Testing, the inside of a mask is the region
where waveform data would not normally fall. A telecom standard requires two, three, or four of
these masks. Pulse standards always have two masks. Standards with eye patterns usually have
three masks, but some have four. Table 2-15 lists these commands.
Table 2-15: Mask Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return mask parameters
MASK?
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Controls whether or not an
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe
autoset will automatically be
done after a standard mask
is selected (TDS 500D &
700D)
Controls whether or not a
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj
standard-mask autoset has
the freedom to adjust
vertical offset so that the
waveform matches the
mask (TDS 500D & 700D)
Autosets a mask to a
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard
specific standard.
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Clears mask counts and
MASK:COUNt
restarts counting)
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Controls whether or not
MASK:COUNt:STATE
mask counting occurs
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Returns the sum of all the
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
hits in all the defined tasks
(TDS 500D & 700D)
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? Returns the number of
waveforms that have
contributed to mask
counting (TDS 500D &
700D)
Controls whether or not
MASK:DISplay
defined masks are
displayed on the screen
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Controls whether or not a
MASK:FILTer
digital filter will be run on
the waveform data
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Makes masks inverted with
MASK:INVert
respect to standard
orientation (TDS 500D &
38
MASK:MARgin:PERCent
MASK:MARgin:STATE
MASK:MASK<x>
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNt?
MASK:MASK<x>:NR_Pt?
MASK:MASK<x>:POInts
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt
MASK:PASSFail:BELl
MASK:PASSFail:STATE
MASK:PASSFail:STATUs
MASK:PASSFail:THReshold
MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform
MASK:SOUrce
MASK:STANdard
700D)
Defines the mask margin in
percent (TDS 500D &
700D)
Turns mask margins on or
off (TDS 500D & 700D)
With delete argument,
deletes all points in the
specified mask. With query
form, queries the state of
settable parameters of the
specified mask (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Returns the number of hits
in the specified mask
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Returns the number of
points in the specified mask
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Defines points in user
coordinates in the specified
mask (TDS 500D & 700D)
Defines points in a mask in
percentage coordinates
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Defines when the pass/fail
bell will sound (TDS 500D &
700D)
Controls whether mask
pass/fail testing occurs
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Returns whether mask
pass/fail testing is passing,
passed, or failed
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Defines the number of
counts which are
considered a mask testing
failure (TDS 500D & 700D)
Defines the minimum
number of waveforms to be
acquired for mask pass/fail
counting (TDS 500D &
700D)
Selects which trace will be
compared against the
mask(s) during counting
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Delete any currently
existing mask(s) and
replace with standard
mask(s) (TDS 500D &
700D)
39
MASK:TBPosition
Set the time base position
to the value of the argument
(TDS 500D & 700D)
40
Measurement Commands
Measurement commands control the automated measurement system. Up to four automated
measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the commands, these four measurement
readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. Table 2-16 lists these commands.
In addition to the four displayed measurements, the measurement commands let you specify a
fifth measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement has no front-panel equivalent.
Immediate measurements are never displayed. Because they are computed only when needed,
immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, you use the VALue? query to obtain
measurement results.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You can assign some
parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each measurement readout. Other
parameters, such as reference levels, have only one value, which applies to all measurements.
Table 2-16: Measurement Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return all measurement
MEASUrement?
parameters
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapsh
ot
Remove measurement
snapshot from the display
Set or query measurement
MEASUrement:GATING
gating
Return immediate
MEASUrement:IMMed?
measurement parameters
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Return information on
immediate delay
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:
DIRection
Search direction to use for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:
EDGE1
Specify which waveform
edge to use for delay
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:
EDGE2
Specify which waveform
edge to use for delay
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURC
E[1]
Specify the channel (or
histogram with the
TDS 500D & 700D) to take
measurement from
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURC
E2
Specify the second channel
to take measurement from
41
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
(delay or "to" channel)
Specify the measurement to
be taken
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?
Return measurement units
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CO
UNt?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DEL
ay?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DEL
ay:DIRection
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DEL
ay:EDGE1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DEL
ay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAX
imum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEA
N?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINI
mum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOU
RCE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOU
RCE2
Return measurement result
Return parameters on
measurement
Returns the number of
values accumulated for this
measurement since the last
statistical reset (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Return delay measurement
parameters.
Search direction to use for
delay measurements
Which waveform edge to
use for delay
measurements
Which waveform edge to
use for delay
measurements
Returns the maximum
value found for this
measurement since the last
statistical reset (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Returns the mean value
accumulated for this
measurement since the last
statistical reset (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Returns the minimum value
found for this measurement
since the last statistical
reset (TDS 500D & 700D)
Channel (or histogram with
the TDS 500D & 700D) to
take measurement from
Second channel (or
42
histogram with the
TDS 500D & 700D) to take
measurement from (delay
or "to" channel)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STA
TE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STD
dev
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYP
e
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNI
TS?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VAL
ue?
MEASUrement:METHod
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABS
olute:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABS
olute:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABS
olute:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABS
olute:MID2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:MET
Hod
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PER
Cent:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PER
Cent:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PER
Cent:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PER
Cent:MID2
Turn measurement display
on or off
Returns the standard
deviation of values
accumulated for this
measurement since the last
statistical reset (TDS 500D
& 700D)
The measurement to be
taken
Return units to use for
measurement
Return measurement result
Method for calculating
reference levels
Return reference levels
The top level for risetime
(90% level)
The low level for risetime
(10% level)
Mid level for measurements
Mid level for delay
measurements
Method to assign HIGH and
LOW levels: either % or
absolute volts
The top level for risetime
(90% level)
The low level for risetime
(10% level)
Mid level for measurements
Mid level for delay
measurements
43
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MO
De
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WE
Ighting
Display measurement
snapshot
Controls operation and
display of measurement
statistics (TDS 500D &
700D)
Controls the
responsiveness of mean
and standard deviation to
waveform changes
(TDS 500D & 700D)
44
Miscellaneous Commands
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories. Table 2-17 lists these commands.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987 devices on the GPIB bus. The
488.2-1987 standard defines them. They begin with a star (*) character.
Table 2-17: Miscellaneous Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Automatic instrument setup
AUTOSet
Audio alert
BELl
Set date
DATE
Define group execute
*DDT
trigger (GET)
Reset to factory default
FACtory
Same as HEADer
HDR
Return command header
HEADer
with query
Identification
*IDN?
Learn device setting
*LRN?
Lock front panel (local
LOCk
lockout)
Change password for User
NEWpass
Protected Data
Access to change User
PASSWord
Protected Data
No action; remark only
REM
Same as *LRN?
SET?
Initialize waveforms and
TEKSecure
setups
Set time
TIMe
Perform Group Execute
*TRG
Trigger (GET)
Self-test
*TST?
Unlock front panel (local
UNLock
lockout)
Return full command name
VERBose
or minimum spellings with
query
45
RS-232 Commands
RS-232 commands allow you to utilize the serial communications port (available with the RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface). Table 2-18 lists these commands.
Table 2-18: RS-232 Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return RS-232 parameters
RS232?
Set baud rate
RS232:BAUd
Set hard flagging
RS232:HARDFlagging
Set parity
RS232:PARity
RS232:SOFTFlagging
Set soft flagging
Set # of stop bits
RS232:STOPBits
46
Save and Recall Commands
Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings.
When you "save a setup," you save all the settings of the oscilloscope. When you then "recall a
setup," the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you originally saved that setting.
Table 2-19 lists these commands.
Table 2-19: Save and Recall Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return the number of
ALLOcate?
allocated and unallocated
data points
Return the number of
ALLOcate:WAVEform?
allocated data points
Return the number of
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?
unallocated data points
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x> Specify the number of
allocated data points
Delete a stored setup
DELEte:SETUp
Delete a stored waveform
DELEte:WAVEform
Recall settings
*RCL
Replace the indicated
RECAll:ACQDATA
channel’s live acquisition
data with data from
indicated file (TDS 500D &
700D)
Recall an image histogram
RECALL:IMAGEHistogram
from disk
Recall saved instrument
RECAll:SETUp
settings
Recall saved waveform
RECAll:WAVEform
(File System Only)
Save settings
*SAV
Write out acquisition data to
SAVe:ACQDATA
the indicated file
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Save an image histogram to
SAVe:IMAGEHistogram
disk
Save instrument settings
SAVe:SETUp
Save waveform
SAVe:WAVEform
Specifies the file format for
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
saved waveforms (Not
available for the TDS 510A)
47
Status and Error Commands
Status and error commands allow you to determine the status of the oscilloscope and to control
events. Table 2-20 lists these commands.
Several commands and queries used with the oscilloscope are common to all devices on the
GPIB bus. IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these commands and queries. They begin with an
asterisk (*).
Table 2-20: Status and Error Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return all events
ALLEv?
Return scope status
BUSY?
Clear status
*CLS
Device event status enable
DESE
Event status enable
*ESE
Return standard event
*ESR?
status register
Return event code
EVENT?
Return event code and
EVMsg?
message
Return number of events in
EVQty?
queue
Identification
ID?
Operation complete
*OPC
Return installed options
*OPT?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Power-on status clear
*PSC
Query or set User Protected
*PUD
Data
Reset
*RST
Service request enable
*SRE
Read status byte
*STB?
Wait to continue
*WAI
48
Trigger Commands
Trigger commands control all aspects of oscilloscope triggering. Table 2-21 lists these
commands.
There are two triggers, main and delayed. Where appropriate, the command set has parallel
constructions for each trigger.
You can set the main or delayed triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you display a
waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing.
You can also set TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, and 700D main triggers to pulse and logic modes.
Pulse triggering lets the oscilloscope trigger whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or
height. Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or more channels. The
oscilloscope then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels.
Table 2-21: Trigger Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Force trigger event; Return
TRIGger
parameters.
Delay trigger level to 50%
TRIGger:DELay
Delay by time or events
TRIGger:DELay:BY
Return delay trigger
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?
parameters
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPli
ng
Delay trigger coupling
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe Delay trigger slope
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrc
e
Delay trigger source
Return delay trigger event
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?
parameters
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COU
Nt
Delay by events count
Delay trigger level
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel
Time for delay by time
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe
Delay trigger, edge
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe
Main trigger level to 50%
TRIGger:MAIn
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:AMI:PULSEForm
AMI pulse form setting (an
Eye Diagram,
AMI pulse form setting (an
Isolated +1, or an Isolated 1) (TDS 500D & 700D)
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:AMI:THReshold:HIGH
AMI threshold high level
(TDS 500D & 700D)
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:AMI:THReshold:LOW
AMI threshold low level
(TDS 500D & 700D)
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
49
:BITRate
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:CMI:PULSEForm
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:CODe
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:NRZ:PULSEForm
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication
:STANdard
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPlin
g
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTU
al?
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALu
e
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtio
n
Communication trigger bit
rate (TD 500D & 700D)
CMI pulse form (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Select which line code the
comm trigger should expect
on the incoming signal
(TDS 500D & 700D)
NRZ pulse form (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Communication trigger
source channel (TDS 500D
& 700D)
Communication trigger
standard which identifies
the code and bit rate
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Return main edge trigger
parameters
Main trigger coupling
Main trigger slope
Main trigger source
Main trigger holdoff value
Return main trigger holdoff
value in seconds
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Main trigger holdoff default
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Main trigger holdoff time
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Main trigger holdoff value
(TDS 400A & 510A)
Main trigger level
Returns main logic trigger
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Logic trigger input usage
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Logic trigger input
combining (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
50
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:C
H<x>
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:CH4
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:LESSLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:MORELimit
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:CLOCk:EDGE
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:CLOCk:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:CLOCk:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:DATa:LEVel
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:DATa:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
:HOLDTime
Return main logic trigger
input settings (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Logic trigger expected
channel state (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Logic trigger expected for
channel 4 pattern class
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Main logic pattern trigger
condition (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Maximum time the selected
pattern may be true and still
generate main logic pattern
trigger (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Minimum time the selected
pattern may be true and still
generate main logic pattern
trigger (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Clock edge polarity for
setup and hold violation
triggering (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Setup/Hold clock voltage
trigger level (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Setup/Hold clock input
source (TDS 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Setup/Hold data level
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Setup/Hold data input data
channel (TDS 500D, 600B,
& 700D)
Setup/Hold trigger hold time
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold
51
:SETTime
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:I
NPut:CH4
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:
WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THResh
old?
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THResh
old:CH<x>
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:F
LITer
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:P
OLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:
WIDth
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?
Setup/Hold trigger set time
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Logic trigger expected for
channel 4 state class
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
When the logic trigger
occurs (on true or false)
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Return main logic
thresholds (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Logic trigger thresholds
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Logic trigger on
combination true or false
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Main trigger mode
Return pulse trigger
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Pulse trigger class
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Returns glitch trigger
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Glitch filter on and off
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Glitch filter positive,
negative, or both
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Glitch trigger with
differentiation between
glitch and valid pulse
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Return runt trigger
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
52
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:P
OLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:T
HReshold?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:T
HReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:T
HReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:T
HReshold:LOW
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:
WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:
WIDth
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:DELTATime
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:SLEWRate?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWR
ate:WHEn
Runt trigger positive,
negative, or both
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Return runt trigger
thresholds (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Trigger level switching
thresholds (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Upper limit for runt pulse
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Lower limit for runt pulse
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Runt pulse width type to
check for (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Minimum width for valid
main pulse runt trigger
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Slew rate trigger delta time
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Slew rate trigger polarity
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Return slew rate value
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Upper and lower slew rate
trigger thresholds
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Upper limit for slew rate
pulse (TDS 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Lower limit for slew rate
pulse (TDS 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Slewing signal type to
53
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOu
t:POLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOu
t:TIMe
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:H
IGHLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:L
OWLimit
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:P
OLarity
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:
WHEn
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDTy
pe
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat?
check for (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Pulse trigger channel
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Pulse timeout trigger
polarity (TDS 500D, 600B,
& 700D)
Pulse timeout trigger time
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Return trigger pulse width
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Pulse trigger maximum
pulse width (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Pulse trigger minimum
pulse width (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D)
Pulse trigger positive,
negative, or both
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D)
Pulse trigger when pulse
detected or when not
detected (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Set main trigger edge, logic,
pulse, or, with options,
video and communications
Returns video trigger
parameters (Option 05)
Set video trigger delay
mode (TDS 400A
Option 05)
Set video trigger field
Set video trigger field type
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05)
Return FlexFormat
parameters (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D
Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
54
mat:FIELDRATE
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:FIELDS
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:LINES
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:NEGSynchwidth
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:V1STArttime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:V1STOptime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:V2STArttime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXfor
mat:V2STOptime
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff
?
Set FlexFormat frames per
second (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B Option 05)
Set FlexFormat video fields
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05)
Set FlexFormat lines in a
frame (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D Option 05)
Set FlexFormat negative
sync width (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D
Option 05)
Set time from positive (+)
edge of tri-sync pulse for
the last line in the selected
field to the leading edge (-)
of the first negative vertical
sync pulse (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D
Option 05)
Set time from positive (+)
edge of tri-sync pulse for
the last line in the selected
field (t0) to trailing edge
(positive) of the first
negative vertical sync pulse
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05)
Set time from t0 to the
leading edge (positive) of
the second vertical sync
pulse (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D Option 05)
Set time from t0 to the
trailing edge (positive) of
the second negative vertical
sync pulse (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D
Option 05)
High definition TV format
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05)
Return video trigger holdoff
(TDS 400A Option 05)
55
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:
VALue
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERL
Ace
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSC
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPe
riod
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdar
d
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe
TRIGger:STATE?
Set video trigger holdoff
value (TDS 400A
Option 05)
Set video trigger interlace
format (TDS 400A
Option 05)
Set video trigger delay in
terms of a number of lines
(Option 05)
Set video trigger delay in
terms of a number of lines
(TDS 400A Option 05)
Select color or mono NTSC
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05 Only)
Select color or mono PAL
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, &
700D Option 05 Only)
Set video trigger scan rate
(TDS 400A Option 05)
Set video scan period
(TDS 400A Option 05)
Select video trigger source
(Option 05)
Select video trigger
standard (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D Option 05)
Select video trigger sync
polarity (Option 05)
Select video trigger class
(TDS 400A Option 05)
Set video trigger delay time
(TDS 400A Option 05)
Return trigger system
status
56
Vertical Commands
Vertical commands control the display of channels and of main and reference waveforms. Table
2-22 lists these commands.
The SELect:<wfm> command also selects the waveform many commands in other command
groups use.
You may replace VOLts for SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides program compatibility
with earlier models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Table 2-22: Vertical Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return vertical parameters
CH<x>?
Channel bandwidth
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Channel coupling
CH<x>:COUPling
Channel deskew time
CH<x>:DESKew
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Channel impedance
CH<x>:IMPedance
Channel offset
CH<x>:OFFSet
Channel position
CH<x>:POSition
Return channel probe
CH<x>:PROBE?
attenuation
Return channel probe cal
CH<x>:PROBECal?
status (TDS500D, 600B, &
700D)
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten Sets the state of the
external attenuation for the
specified channel to the
specified value (TDS 500D
& 700D)
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatt
en
Sets the state of the
external attenuation for the
specified channel to the
specified value in dB
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Channel volts per div
CH<x>:SCAle
Same as CH<x>:SCAle
CH<x>:VOLts
Return math waveform
MATH<x>?
definition
Define math waveform
MATH<x>:DEFine
Acquisition number at which
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
to begin exponential
averaging (TDS 510A,
500D, 600B, & 700D; some
models require Option 2F)
Math waveform averaging
MATH<x>:PROCessing
on or off (TDS 510A, 500D,
600B, & 700D; some
models require Option 2F)
57
SELect?
SELect:<wfm>
SELect:CONTROl
Return selected waveform
Set selected waveform
Front-panel channel
selector
58
Waveform Commands
Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope.
Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform. One data value usually
represents one data point in the waveform record. When working with enveloped waveforms,
each data value is either the min or max of a min/max pair. Before you transfer waveform data,
you must specify the data format, record length, and waveform locations. Table 2-23 lists these
commands.
Table 2-23: Waveform Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Transfer waveform data
CURVe
The format and location of
DATa
the waveform data that is
transferred with the CURVe
command
Destination for waveforms
DATa:DESTination
sent to the oscilloscope
Waveform data encoding
DATa:ENCdg
method
Source of CURVe? data
DATa:SOUrce
Starting point in waveform
DATa:STARt
transfer
Ending point in waveform
DATa:STOP
transfer
Same as
DATa:TARget
DATa:DESTination
Byte width of waveform
DATa:WIDth
points
Return waveform preamble
WAVFrm?
and data
Return waveform format
WAVPre?
data
Preamble bit width of
WFMPre:BIT_Nr
waveform points
Preamble binary encoding
WFMPre:BN_Fmt
type
Preamble byte width of
WFMPre:BYT_Nr
waveform points
Preamble byte order of
WFMPre:BYT_Or
waveform points
Preamble checksum of
WFMPre:CRVchk
waveform points
Preamble encoding method
WFMPre:ENCdg
Number of points in the
WFMPre:NR_Pt
curve
Format of curve points
WFMPre:PT_Fmt
Trigger position
WFMPre:PT_Off
Curve identifier
WFMPre:WFId
Horizontal sampling interval
WFMPre:XINcr
59
WFMPre:XMUlt
WFMPre:XOFf
WFMPre:XUNit
WFMPre:XZEro
WFMPre:YMUlt
WFMPre:YOFf
WFMPre:YUNit
WFMPre:YZEro
WFMPre:ZMUlt
WFMPre:ZOFf
WFMPre:ZUNit
WFMPre:ZZEro
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
Horizontal scale factor
Horizontal offset
Horizontal units
Horizontal origin offset
Vertical scale factor
Vertical offset
Vertical units
Offset voltage
Z-axis scale factor
Z-axis offset
Z-axis units
Z-axis origin offset
Number of points in the
curve
Format of curve points
Trigger position
Curve identifier
Horizontal sampling interval
Horizontal units
Horizontal units (TDS 500D,
600B, & 700D)
Vertical scale factor
Vertical offset
Vertical units
Offset voltage
Waveform Data Formats
Acquired waveform data uses either one or two 8-bit data bytes to represent each data point. The
number of bytes used depends on the acquisition mode used when you acquired the data. Data
acquired in SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKdetect mode uses one 8-bit byte per waveform data
point. Data acquired in HIRes or AVErage mode uses two 8-bit bytes per point. For more
information on the acquisition modes, see the ACQuire: MODe command description.
The DATa:WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per data point when transferring
data to and from the oscilloscope. If you specify two bytes for data that uses only one byte, the
least significant byte will be filled with zeros. If you specify one byte for data that uses two bytes,
the least significant byte will be ignored.
The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format. You specify the
format with the DATa:ENCdg command.
ASCII data is represented by signed integer values. The range of the values depends on the byte
width specified. One byte wide data ranges from -128 to 127. Two byte wide data ranges from 32768 to 32767.
Each data value requires two to seven characters: one to five characters to represent the value,
another character, if the value is negative, to represent a minus sign, and a comma to separate
the data points.
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:
60
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,-109,-107, -106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,80
Use ASCII to obtain output that is more human readable and easier to format than binary output.
However, ASCII format may require more bytes to send the same values than does binary. This
may reduce transmission speeds.
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or positive integer values. The range of the
values depends on the byte width specified. When the byte width is one, signed integer data
ranges from -128 to 127 and positive integer values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is
two, the values range from -32768 to 32767.
The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are transferred. The four
binary formats are RIBinary, RPBinary, SRIbinary, and SRPbinary.
RIBinary is a signed-integer format, where the most significant byte is transferred first, and
RPBinary is a positive-integer format where the most significant byte is transferred first. SRIbinary
and SRPbinary formats correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary formats respectively but use a
swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first. The byte order is ignored
when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.
Waveform Data/Record Lengths
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a portion of the
waveform, or you can transfer the entire record. The DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands
let you specify the first and last data points of the waveform record.
When transferring data into the oscilloscope, you must specify the location of the first data point
within the waveform record. For example, when you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be
stored starting with the first point in the record, and when you set DATa:STARt to 500, data will be
stored starting at the 500th point in the record. The oscilloscope will ignore DATa:STOP when
reading in data as it will stop reading data when it has no more data to read or when it has
reached the specified record length.
When transferring data from the oscilloscope, you must specify the first and last data points in the
waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to the record length will always
return the entire waveform. You can also use the vertical bar cursors to delimit the portion of the
waveform that you want to transfer. DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP can then be set to the current
cursor positions by sending the command DATa SNAp.
Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the data location when transferring waveforms from the
oscilloscope. You can transfer out multiple waveforms at one time by specifying more than one
source.
You can transfer only one waveform at a time into the oscilloscope. Waveforms sent to the
oscilloscope are always stored in one of the four reference memory locations. You can specify the
reference memory location with the DATa:DESTination command. You must define the memory
size for the specified location before you store the data. The ALLOcate:WAVEFORM:REF<x>
command lets you specify the memory size for each reference location.
Waveform Preamble
61
Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble that contains information
such as the horizontal scale, the vertical scale, and other settings in place when the waveform
was created. Refer to the WFMPre command descriptions for more information about the
waveform preamble.
Scaling Waveform Data
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data points into voltage
values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble. The GETWFM program on the
diskette that comes with this manual describes how to scale data.
Transferring Waveform Data from the TDS Family Oscilloscope
You can transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller using the following
sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using the DATa:SOUrce command. If you want to transfer
multiple waveforms, select more than one source.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using DATa:STARt and
DATa:STOP.
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe? query.
6. Transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope using the CURVe?query.
Transferring Waveform Data to the Oscilloscope
You can transfer waveform data to one of the four reference memory locations in the oscilloscope
using the following sequence:
1. Specify waveform reference memory using DATa:DESTination.
2. Specify the memory size for the reference location specified in Step 1 using the
ALLOcate:WAVEFORM:REF<x> command.
3. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.
5. Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe:<wfm>.
7. Transfer waveform data to the oscilloscope using CURVe.
Extended-Acquisition Length Mode (TDS 500D & 700D, Option 2M)
62
Waveform commands also work with extended-acquisition-length mode. This mode lets the
oscilloscope acquire extended acquisition lengths of 2M, 4M, and 8M while maintaining waveform
record lengths limited to 500K.
In other words, the acquisition data for a channel may be bigger than a waveform you view. Then,
after the data is acquired, you can move to and display any portion of the data.
This mode lets you select a subsection of the larger acquisition data. You can select the starting
and ending positions in the acquisition data and the waveform record.
NOTE: To function properly, extended acquisition mode forces some oscilloscope modes and
settings to new values. Also, measurements, gating, and cursors are restricted to the current
waveform record.
Table 2-24 below shows the correlation between the number of channels in use and the waveform
record lengths.
Table 2-24: Table of Extended-Acquisition-Length Mode Channels and Record Lengths
=============================================
Waveform
# of Channels in Use
Extended
Record Length
Acquisition
Length
------------------------------------------------------------------------------8 M samples
500 K samples
1 of 4
(not on the TDS 520D
and TDS 724D)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 of 4
4 M samples
250 K samples
(or on the TDS 520D
and TDS 724D:
1 of 2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 or 4 of 4
2 M samples
100 K samples
(or on the TDS 520D
and TDS 724D:
2 of 2)
From a software development viewpoint, to define how much of the extended acquisition length
data to include, you can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
To define the waveform record within the extended acquisition data, you can use the
HORizontal:RECORDSTART or HORizontal:POSition command.
The CURVe? query will return the extended acquisition data as you defined it with DATa:STARt
and DATa:STOP. With extended-acquisition-mode set to on, this can be much larger than the
waveform record. With extended-acquisition-mode set to off, this is equal to the waveform record.
Commands related to extended-acquisition-length mode operations include:
CURVe, DATa RECORDSHAp, DATa SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?, HORizontal:ACQLENGTH, HORizontal:EXTDACQ,
HORizontal:POSition, HORizontal:RECORDSTART, RECAll:ACQDATA, SAVe:ACQDATA, and
WFMPre:<wfm?>.
NOTE: Extended-acquisition-length mode CURVe? queries can easily return more data than will
fit on a 1.44 Mbyte floppy. For example, to return an entire 8 M extended acquisition mode record
63
in ASCII format can require over 26.8 Mbytes of hard disk space. It can also take over 25 minutes
to do this on some models.
64
Zoom Commands
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally and vertically
without changing the time base or vertical settings. Table 2-25 lists these commands.
Table 2-25: Zoom Commands
==============================================
Header
Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Reset zoom parameters to
ZOOm
defaults
Turn dual zoom mode on
ZOOm:DUAl
and off (Not on TDS 510A)
Adjust the requested
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet
horizontal offset between
the centers of the main and
second zoom boxes (Not on
TDS 510A)
Select between the upper
ZOOm:GRAticule
and lower graticule for use
by the zoom preview state
(Not on TDS 510A)
Horizontal zoom lock
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
Horizontal zoom position
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition
Horizontal zoom scale
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle
Turn zoom mode on or off
ZOOm:STATE
(you can also turn on the
preview mode - not on the
TDS 510A)
Vertical zoom position
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition
Vertical zoom scale
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle
65
Syntax
You can control the oscilloscope through the GPIB interface using commands and queries. This
section describes the syntax these commands and queries use. It also describes the conventions
the oscilloscope uses to process them. The next section, entitled Commands, lists the commands
and queries themselves.
Backus-Naur Grammar Overview
Command and Query Structure
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope
Constructed Mnemonics
Command Entry
Argument Types
66
Backus-Naur Grammar Overview
This help file describes commands and queries using Backus-Naur Form (BNF) notation.
This file uses the following BNF symbols shown in Table 2-1 below:
Table 2-1: BNF Symbols and Meanings
==============================================
Symbol
Meaning
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<>
Defined element
::=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
{}
Group; one element is required
[]
Optional; can be omitted
...
Previous element(s) may be repeated
()
Comment
==============================================
67
Command and Query Structure
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually simply called commands and
queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the oscilloscope to perform a specific
action. Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and information about its status.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the command differs
from the set form by its question mark on the end. For example, the set command
ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all commands have both a set and a
query form. Some commands have set only and some have query only.
A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the oscilloscope
needs to execute the command or query. Command messages may contain five element types,
defined in the Table 2-2 shown below.
Table 2-2: Command Message Elements
==================================
Symbol
Meaning
------------------------------------------------------------<Header>
The basic command name. If the header ends with a question mark, the
command is a query. The header may begin with a colon (:) character. If the
command is concatenated with other commands, the beginning colon is required.
Never use the beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
A header sub-function. Some command headers have only one mnemonic. If a
command header has multiple mnemonics, a colon (:) character always
separates them from each other.
<Argument>
A quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header. Some
commands have no argument while others have multiple arguments. A <Space>
separates arguments from the header. A <Comma> separates arguments from
each other.
<Comma>
A single comma between arguments of multiple-argument commands. It may
optionally have white space characters before and after the comma.
<Space>
A white space character between command header and argument. It may
optionally consist of multiple white space characters.
Commands
Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of its settings.
Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree
structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a
level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a
lower level. The leading colon (:) always returns you to the base of the command tree.
Queries
Queries cause the oscilloscope to return information about its status or settings. Queries have the
structure:
68
•
[:]<Header>?
•
[:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted.
These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or
level. For example, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection? returns the starting point and
direction of the edge of a delayed measurement, while MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? returns
the current settings of all delayed measurement parameters, and MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
returns all the measurement parameters for the specified measurement.
Headers in Query Responses
You can control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query response. Use the
HEADer command to control this feature. If header is on, the query response returns command
headers and formats itself as a valid set command. When header is off, the response includes
only the values. This may make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response.
Table 2-3 below shows the difference in responses.
Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and On Responses
========================================================
Header Off
Header On
Query
Response
Response
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------APPMenu:TITLe?
"Test Setup" :APPMENU:TITLE "Test Setup"
ACQuire:NUMAVg? 100
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100
=========================================================
69
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query by
using the Device Clear (DCL) GPIB command.
70
Argument Types
The argument of a command may be in one of several forms. The individual descriptions of each
command tell which argument types to use with that command.
Numeric Arguments
Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments. The syntax shows the format that the
oscilloscope returns in response to a query. This is also the preferred format when sending the
command to the oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted. This manual represents
these arguments as follows:
==========================================
Symbol
Meaning
--------------------------------------------------------------------------<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
==========================================
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, either by rounding or
truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description.
Quoted String Arguments
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is simply a group of
ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double quote ("). For example:
"this is a quoted string"
=====================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------<QString> Quoted string of ASCII text
=====================================
Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character set.
2. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string:
"this is a valid string"
3. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule:
"this is an 'acceptable' string"
4. You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the quote. For example,
"here is a "" mark"
5. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
6. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message
before the closing delimiter.
71
7. A carriage return or line feed imbedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string, but is
treated as just another character in the string.
8. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
•
"Invalid string argument'
(quotes are not of the same type)
•
"test<EOI>"
(termination character is embedded in the string)
Block Arguments
Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form:
========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<NZDig> A non-zero digit character, in the range 1-9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range 0-9
<DChar> A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF hexadecimal (0 through 255
decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes, defined as:
<Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]
|#0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }
========================================================
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the <Dig> elements
form a decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar> elements follow.
72
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a channel
mnemonic can be either CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4. You use these mnemonics in the command
just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a CH1:VOLts command, and there is
also a CH2:VOLts command. In the command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as
CH<x>.
Application Menu Mnemonics
When the application menu is displayed, commands may specify which menu button to use.
=========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM<x> A main menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. Main menu buttons are
located along the bottom of the display and are numbered left to right, starting
with 1.
RIGHT<x>
A side menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Side menu buttons are
located along the right side of the display and are numbered top to bottom,
starting with 1.
=========================================================
Color Index Mnemonics
Commands can specify a color index as a mnemonic in the header. The color index is specified in
this way:
=========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------P<x>
A color index specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15
=========================================================
Cursor Position Mnemonics
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use.
=========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSITION<x> A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
=========================================================
Mask Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify which mask to set or query as a mnemonic in the header. The masks are
specified in this way:
=========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MASK<x> A mask specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
=========================================================
73
Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header. Up to
four automated measurements may be displayed with each displayed waveform. The displayed
measurements are specified in this way:
=========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MEAS<x> A measurement specifier; <x> is either 1 [top], 2, 3, or 4 [bottom].
=========================================================
Channel Mnemonics
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.
========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CH<x>
A channel specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, or 4.
For the TDS 520D, 620B, 680B, and TDS 724D, CH3 and CH4 represent the
front-panel inputs labeled AUX 1 and AUX 2 respectively.
========================================================
Math Waveform Mnemonics
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header.
========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATH<x> A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1, 2, or 3.
========================================================
Reference Waveform Mnemonics
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header.
========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------REF<x>
A reference waveform specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, or 4.
========================================================
Waveform Mnemonics
In some commands, you can specify a waveform regardless of whether it is a channel waveform,
a math waveform, or a reference waveform. Specify such a waveform as follows:
========================================================
Symbol
Meaning
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<wfm>
Can be CH<x>, MATH<x> or REF<x>
74
========================================================
75
Command Entry
•
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
•
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space characters include
any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and 0B through 20
hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
•
The oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters
and line feeds
Abbreviating Commands
You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands. Each command listing in the Commands
section shows the abbreviations in capitals. For example, you can enter the command
ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.
Keep in mind that abbreviation rules change over time as new TDS models are introduced. Thus,
for the most robust code, use the full spelling. Avoid using the command abbreviations.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses,
you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full-length. The
VERBose command lets you control this.
Concatenating Commands
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon (;). The
oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all
commands but the first. For example, the commands TRIGger:MODe NORMal and
ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 would be concatenated into a single command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic, you can
abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon. For example, you can
concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 into a
single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 10
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*TRG
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*TRG;NUMAVg 10
76
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to
10.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are concatenated into a
single response message. For example, if the display intensity for text is 80% and for the
waveform it is 90%, the concatenated query
DISplay:INTENsity:TEXt?;WAVEform?
will return either
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT 80;:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 90
if header is on or
80;90
if header is off.
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For example,
ACQuire:MODe NORMal;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to normal. The message then queries
the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state. Concatenated
commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
•
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
(no colon before ACQuire)
•
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:WAVEform 90
(extra colon before WAVEform - could use DISPlay:INTENsity:WAVEform instead)
•
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:*TRG
(colon before a star (*) command)
•
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM1 "foo";LABel:BOTTOM2 "fee"
(levels of the mnemonics are different - either remove the second use of LABel: or
place :APPMenu: in front of LABel:BOTTOM2)
Message Terminators
This manual uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message terminator.
===========================
Symbol
Meaning
-----------------------------------------------<EOM>
Message terminator
===========================
The end-of-message terminator may be the END message (EOI asserted concurrently with the
last data byte), the ASCII code for line feed (LF) sent as the last data byte, or both. The
oscilloscope always terminates messages with LF and EOI. It allows white space before the
terminator. For example, it allows CR LF.
77
ACQuire?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all the current acquisition parameters.
Group: Acquisition
Syntax: ACQuire?
Example: ACQUIRE?
might return the string
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1
for the current acquisition parameters.
78
ACQuire:AUTOSAve
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Saves waveforms in reference memory when acquisition completes. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting Autosave Single Seq in the Acquire menu and the
corresponding side menu Off or On items.
When you start a Single Sequence with Autosave set to ON, the oscilloscope nulls out all existing
reference waveforms. At the end of Single Sequence, the oscilloscope saves all displayed live
channels to reference waveform memory. It saves references in the order Ch1 -> Ref1, Ch2 ->
Ref2, Ch3 -> Ref3, Ch4 -> Ref4. The exact number of references saved may depend on the
record length used.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and return values.
However, this ACQuire:AUTOSave feature will not actually work while extended-acquisitionlength mode is on.
Group: Acquisition
Syntax 1: ACQuire:AUTOSAve { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ACQuire:AUTOSAve?
Arguments: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns autosave mode off.
ON or <NR1> turns autosave mode on.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE 1
turns autosave mode on.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE OFF
turns autosave off.
Example 3: ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE?
might return 1, indicating that autosave mode is on.
79
ACQuire:MODe
Description: Sets or queries the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope. This affects all live
waveforms. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Mode in the Acquire menu.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals. Each acquisition
interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale (time per division). The oscilloscope
sampling system always samples at the maximum rate, and so an acquisition interval may include
more than one sample.
The acquisition mode, which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command, determines how the
final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and return values.
However, the oscilloscope will treat all modes, except Peak Detect, as Sample mode.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMENv, CURVe?, DATa:WIDth
Syntax 1:
For the TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 700D:
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | HIRes | AVErage | ENVelope }
For the TDS 600B:
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | AVErage | ENVelope }
Syntax 2:
For all TDS:
ACQuire:MODe?
Arguments: SAMple - specifies that the displayed data point value is simply the first sampled
value that was taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all waveform data has 8 bits
of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe? query, but the lower-order 8 bits of data
will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.
PEAKdetect - specifies the display of the high-low range of the samples taken from a single
waveform acquisition. The high-low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the
highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal
the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.
HIRes - (for the TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 700D) specifies Hi Res mode, where the displayed
data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval. This is a
form of averaging, where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition. The number of
samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose
the average.
AVErage - specifies averaging mode, where the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple
data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The number of waveform acquisitions
that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg
command.
ENVelope - specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform shows the PEAKdetect range
of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The number of waveform acquisitions
that go into making up the envelope waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv
command.
80
Example 1: ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE
sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of many individual waveform
acquisitions.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:MODE?
might return ENVELOPE.
81
ACQuire:NUMACq?
(Query Only)
Description: Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since starting acquisition.
This value is reset to zero when any Acquisition, Horizontal, or Vertical arguments that affect the
waveform are modified. The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is (2**30)-1.
Counting stops when this number is reached. This is the same value that is displayed in the upper
center of the screen when the acquisition system is stopped.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:STATE
Syntax: ACQuire:NUMACq?
Returns: <NR1>
Example: ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?
might return 350, indicating that 350 acquisitions took place since an ACQUIRE:STATE RUN
command was executed.
82
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Description: Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting the Average count in the Acquisition Mode side
menu.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1: ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>
Syntax 2: ACQuire:NUMAVg?
Arguments: <NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 2 to 10,000.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 10
specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of combining 10 separately acquired
waveforms.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:NUMAVG?
might return 75, indicating that there are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.
83
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Description: Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting the Envelope count in the Acquisition Mode side
menu.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1: ACQuire:NUMEnv { <NR1> | INFInite }
Syntax 2: ACQuire:NUMEnv?
Argument 1: <NR1> NOT = 0 is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 1 to 2000. The
envelope will restart after the specified number of envelopes have been acquired or when the
ACQuire:STATE RUN command is sent.
Argument 2: INFInite or <NR1> = 0 specifies continuous enveloping.
NOTE: If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and set the number
of envelopes to infinity, the oscilloscope will envelope a maximum of 2001 acquisitions.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:NUMENV 10
specifies that an enveloped waveform will show the result of combining 10 separately acquired
waveforms.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:NUMENV?
might return 0, indicating that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped waveforms.
84
ACQuire:REPEt
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 600B, 700D Only)
Description: Controls repetitive signal acquisition. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Repetitive Signal in the Acquire menu. When the oscilloscope is in real-time operation, this
setting has no effect.
The ACQuire:REPEt command specifies the behavior of the acquisition system during equivalenttime (ET) operation. When repetitive mode is on, the acquisition system will continue to acquire
waveform data until the waveform record is filled with acquired data. When repetitive mode is off
and you specify single acquisition operation, only some of the waveform data points will be set
with acquired data, and the displayed waveform shows interpolated values for the unsampled data
points.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:STOPAfter
Syntax 1: ACQuire:REPEt { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ACQuire:REPEt?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns repetitive mode off.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns repetitive mode on.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:REPET 1
turns repetitive mode on.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:REPET OFF
turns repetitive mode off.
Example 3: ACQUIRE:REPET?
might return 1, indicating that repetitive signal acquisition mode is on.
85
ACQuire:STATE
Description: Starts or stops acquisitions. Sending this command is the equivalent of pressing the
front-panel RUN/STOP button. If ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence, other signal events
may also stop acquisition.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:NUMACq? , ACQuire:REPEt, ACQuire:STOPAfter
Syntax 1: ACQuire:STATE { OFF | ON | RUN | STOP | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ACQuire:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or STOP or <NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions.
Argument 2: ON or RUN or <NR1> NOT = 0 starts acquisition and display of waveforms. If the
command was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence (for instance averaging or
enveloping), RUN restarts the sequence, discarding any data accumulated prior to the STOP. It
also resets the number of acquisitions.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:STATE RUN
starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number of acquisitions count (NUMACQ) to
zero.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:STATE?
returns either 0 or 1, depending on whether the acquisition system is running.
86
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Description: Tells the oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Stop After in the Acquire menu.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and return values.
However, this ACQuire:STOPAfter feature will not actually work while extended-acquisitionlength mode is on.
Group: Acquisition
Related Commands: ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:REPEt
Syntax 1: ACQuire:STOPAfter { RUNSTop | SEQuence | LIMit }
Syntax 2: ACQuire:STOPAfter?
Argument 1: RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop state should be determined by the user
pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button.
Argument 2: SEQuence specifies "single sequence" operation, where the oscilloscope stops
after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy the conditions of the acquisition mode. For
example, if the acquisition mode is set to sample, and the horizontal scale is set to a speed that
allows real-time operation, then the oscilloscope will stop after digitizing a waveform from a single
trigger event. However, if the acquisition mode is set to average 100 waveforms, then the
oscilloscope will stop only after all 100 waveforms have been acquired. The ACQuire: STATE
command and the front-panel RUN/STOP button will also stop acquisition when the oscilloscope
is in single sequence mode.
Argument 3: LIMit specifies the oscilloscope stops after the limit test condition is met.
NOTE: If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and set the number
of envelopes to infinity, the oscilloscope will envelope a maximum of 2001 acquisitions.
Example 1: ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTop
sets the oscilloscope to stop acquisition when the user presses the
front-panel RUN/STOP button.
Example 2: ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER?
might return SEQUENCE.
87
ALIas
Description: Turns command aliases on or off. This command is identical to the ALIas:STATE
command.
Group: Alias
Syntax 1: ALIas { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ALIas?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias label is sent when
ALIas is OFF, an execution error (110, "Command header error") will be generated.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received,
the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
Example 1: ALIAS ON
turns the alias feature on.
Example 2: ALIAS?
returns 1
when aliases are on.
88
ALIas:CATalog?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels, separated by commas. If no
aliases are defined, the query returns the string "".
Group: Alias
Syntax: ALIas:CATalog?
Returns: <QString>[,<QString>...]
Example: ALIAS:CATALOG?
might return the string "SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT", showing there are 3 aliases
named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.
89
ALIas:DEFIne
Description: Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These messages are
then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query provided
ALIas:STATE has been turned ON. The ALIas:DEFIne? query returns the definition of a selected
alias.
Up to 10 aliases can be defined at one time. Aliases can be recursive. That is, aliases can include
other aliases with up to 10 levels of recursion.
Group: Alias
Syntax 1: ALIas:DEFIne <QString><Comma>{ <QString> | <Block> }
Syntax 2: ALIas:DEFIne? <QString>
Argument 1: The first <QString> is the alias label. This label cannot be a command name. Labels
must start with a letter, and can contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters
are not allowed. The label must be < or = 12 characters.
Argument 2: The second <QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must
follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be < or = 80 characters.
NOTE: Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an execution error. To give a new
alias the name of an existing alias, you must first delete the existing alias.
Example 1:
ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON"
defines an alias named "ST1" that sets up the oscilloscope.
Example 2:
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1"
might return
:ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#239:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON
90
ALIas:DELEte
(No Query Form)
Description: Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.
Group: Alias
Syntax: ALIas:DELEte <QString>
Argument: <QString> is the name of the alias you want to remove.
Using ALIas:DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined alias.
Example: ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1"
deletes the alias named SETUP1.
91
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
(No Query Form)
Description: Deletes all existing aliases.
Group: Alias
Syntax: ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Example: ALIAS:DELETE:ALL
deletes all aliases.
92
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
(No Query Form)
Description: Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte.
Group: Alias
Syntax: ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <QString>
Argument: <Qstring> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe without
specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a previously defined alias.
Example: ALIAS:DELETE:NAME "STARTUP"
deletes the alias named STARTUP.
93
ALIas:STATE
Description: Turns aliases on or off. This command is identical to the
ALIas command.
Group: Alias
Syntax 1: ALIas:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ALIas:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is OFF, a command error (102) will be generated.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received,
the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
Example 1: ALIAS:STATE OFF
turns the command alias feature off.
Example 2: ALIAS:STATE?
returns 0 when alias mode is off.
94
ALLEv?
(Query Only)
Description: Causes the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages, and removes the
returned events from the Event Queue. The messages are separated by commas. Use the *ESR?
query to enable the events to be returned. For a complete discussion of the use of these registers,
see the section on Status and Events. This command is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg?
queries to the instrument.
Group: Status and error
Related Commands: *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR, EVENT?, EVMsg?, EVQty, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax: ALLEv?
Returns: The event code and message in the following format:
<EventCode><Comma><QString>[<Comma><EventCode><Comma><QString>...]
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error
is detected by the oscilloscope. As much of the command will be returned as possible without
exceeding the 60 character limit of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined. The
command string is right-justified.
Example: ALLEV?
might return the string
:ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform to measure; ",420,"Query
UNTERMINATED; ".
95
ALLOcate?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory locations.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: ALLOcate?
Example: ALLOCATE?
might return
:ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 50000;REF2 0;REF3 0; REF4 0;, indicating that all 50000
data points are allocated to reference memory location 1.
96
ALLOcate:WAVEform?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory locations.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: ALLOcate:WAVEform?
Example: ALLOCATE?
might return :ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 500;REF2 500;REF3 500; REF4 0;, indicating
that 500 data points are allocated to each of the first three reference memory locations.
97
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the approximate number of data points that have not been allocated.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?
Returns: <NR1> is the approximate number of data points available.
Example: ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?
might return 520 indicating that there are approximately 500 data points available for allocation.
The extra 20 are used for administration purposes.
98
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>
Description: Sets or queries the number of waveform data points for the specified reference
location. If an attempt is made to allocate memory when it is not available, an execution error is
generated and the memory is not allocated.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax 1: ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x> <NR1>
Syntax 2: ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>?
Argument 1: <NR1> = 0 is returned when the reference location is empty.
Argument 2: <NR1> NOT = 0 specifies the number of data points. Table 2-23 below shows the
number of data points supported for reference locations by TDS model. In the TDS 500D and
600B, all invalid values less than the maximum will be forced to the next highest valid value, and
those higher than the maximum will be forced to the maximum. For example, 15002 points on a
TDS 520D with option 1M will allocate 50000 points of data for the reference. No complete
references are stored for 500000 data points in the TDS 700D.
Table 2-23: Waveform Data Points Supported for Reference Locations
===========================================================
TDS 420A,
TDS 510A,
TDS 540D,
TDS 430A,
TDS 520D,
TDS
TDS 754D,
600B
Configuration TDS 460A
TDS 724D
TDS 784D
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------500,
500,
500,
Standard
500,
1000,
1000,
1000,
1000,
2500,
2500,
2500,
2500,
5000,
5000,
5000,
5000,
15000
15000,
15000,
15000,
50000 (4 refs)
30000 (4 refs)
50000
Option 1M
60000 (2 refs), TDS 520D &
75000 ( 3 refs),
(not on the
120000 (1 ref) 724D only:
100000 (2 refs),
TDS 510A)
75000 (3 refs)
130000 (2 refs),
or 2M
100000 (2 refs)
250000 (1 ref),
(TDS 500D &
130000 (2 refs)
500000 (no
700D only)
250000 (1 ref)
complete refs)
===========================================================
Example 1: ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF2 1000
reserves 1,000 data points for REF2.
Example 2: ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1?
might return 500
99
APPMenu
Description: Displays the user-definable Application menu, and the query returns the current
Application menu labels and title. Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the front-panel
APPLICATION button.
Group: Application Menu
Related Commands: CLEARMenu, *ESR, EVENT?
Syntax 1: APPMenu ACTivate
Syntax 2: APPMenu?
Argument: ACTivate displays the Application menu. Use the CLEARMenu command to
deactivate the Application menu.
Once the Application menu is activated, whenever a front-panel menu button is pressed an event
is generated that tells which button was pressed.
Menu button presses will also generate Service Requests when the URQ bit is enabled in DESER
and ESER and the ESB bit is enabled in SRER.
Example: APPMENU ACTIVATE
displays the application menu.
100
APPMenu:LABel
Description: Removes all user-defined Application menu button labels from the display. The
APPMenu:LABel? query returns all the current label settings.
Group: Application Menu
Syntax 1: APPMenu:LABel CLEar
Syntax 2: APPMenu:LABel?
Argument: CLEar removes the main and side menu button labels from the display. Front-panel
bezel button presses will continue to generate events.
Example: APPMENU:LABEL CLEAR
clears the user-defined menu labels from the display.
101
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>
Description: Defines a label for the main menu button that is specified by <x>. Main menu
buttons are located along the bottom of the display, and are numbered from 1 to 7 starting with
the left-most button.
Group: Application Menu
Syntax 1: APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> <QString>
Syntax 2: APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>?
Argument: <QString> is the menu button label and can include any legal TDS character. The
maximum length of the label is 1000 characters. The TDS displays the label in the area above the
specified main menu button.
The TDS displays the label on a single line and centers it, both vertically and horizontally, within
the label area. You can embed a line feed character in the string to position the label on multiple
lines. You can also use white space tab characters to position the label within a line.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two characters
representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least significant eight bits of a 16-bit
number. The number specifies the pixel column relative to the left margin of the label area. For
example, to tab to pixel 13, send TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).
The ESC @ character turns reverse video on and off, and can be embedded in the label string.
The first ESC @ character displays all text following the ESC @ in reverse video until another
ESC @ character is found in the string.
NOTE: The use of any undocumented codes may produce unpredictable results.
The label area is 45 pixels high and 90 pixels wide. The length of the label that fits in the label
area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of characters varies. The label area
is about 10 characters wide and 3 lines high.
If the label exceeds the limits of the label area, either horizontally or vertically, the portion of the
label that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. The label itself is not altered. The entire label
can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed.
Example: APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM3 "SETUP1"
assigns the label "SETUP1" to the third main menu button.
102
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>
Description: Defines a label for the side menu button that is specified by <x>. Side menu buttons
are located on the right side of the display, and are numbered from 1 to 5 starting with the topmost button.
Group: Application Menu
Syntax 1: APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x> <QString>
Syntax 2: APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>?
Argument: <QString> is the menu button label and can include any legal TDS character. The
maximum length of the label is 1000 characters. The label is displayed in the area to the left of the
specified side menu button. Refer to the APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command description for
more information on defining menu labels.
The label area is 72 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that fits in the label
area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of characters varies. The label area
is about 12 characters wide and 2 lines high.
Example: APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT1 "TEST ON" displays the label "TEST ON" next to the top
side menu button.
103
APPMenu:TITLe
Description: Sets or queries the user-defined application menu title. The title is displayed above
the side menu.
Group: Application Menu
Related Commands: APPMenu, APPMenu:LABel
Syntax 1: APPMenu:TITLe <QString>
Syntax 2: APPMenu:TITLe?
Argument: <QString> is the side menu title and can include any legal TDS character. The
maximum length of the title is 1000 characters. The APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command
description provides information on defining menu labels.
The label area is 40 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that fits in the label
area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of characters varies. The label area
is about 12 characters wide and 4 lines high.
Example 1: APPMENU:TITLE "Custom Menu"
displays the title "Custom Menu" on the screen.
Example 2: APPMENU:TITLE?
might return "Test Setup" for the current application menu title.
104
AUTOSet
(No Query Form)
Description: Causes the oscilloscope to adjust its vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls to
provide a stable display of the selected waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to
pressing the front-panel AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of the autoset function, see
Autoset in the Reference section of the User Manual for your instrument.
This command will turn the extended-acquisition-length mode to off.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax: AUTOSet EXECute
Example: EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.
105
BELl
(No Query Form)
Description: Beeps the audio indicator of the oscilloscope.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax: BELl
Example: BELL
rings the bell.
106
BUSY?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the status of the oscilloscope. This command allows you to synchronize the
operation of the oscilloscope with your application program. Synchronization Methods are
described separately in this help system.
Group: Status and error
Related Commands: *OPC, *WAI
Syntax: BUSY?
Returns 1: <NR1> = 0 means that the oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive. These commands are listed in Table 2-24.
Returns 2: <NR1> = 1 means that the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands
listed in Table 2-24.
Table 2-24: Commands that Affect BUSY? Response
==================================================
Operation
Command
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Single sequence
ACQuire:STATE ON or ACQuire:STATE
acquisition
RUN (when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence)
Hardcopy output
HARDCopy STARt
==================================================
Example: BUSY?
might return 1, indicating that the instrument is busy.
107
CAL?
(Query Only)
Description: Instructs the oscilloscope to perform an internal self-calibration and return its
calibration status.
NOTE: The self-calibration can take several minutes to respond. No other commands will be
executed until calibration is complete.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: *CAL?
Returns 1: <NR1> = 0 indicates that the calibration completed without any errors detected.
Returns 2: <NR1> NOT = 0 indicates that the calibration did not complete successfully.
Example: *CAL?
performs an internal self-calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the calibration was
successful.
108
CH<x>?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the vertical parameters. Because CH<x>:SCAle and CH<x>:VOLts are
identical, only CH<x>:SCAle is returned.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: CH<x>?
Example: CH1?
might return the string
:CH1:SCALE 10.0E-3;POSITION 0.0E+0;OFFSET 0.0E+0;COUPLING
DC;IMPEDANCE MEG;BANDWIDTH FULL
for channel 1.
109
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Description: Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified channel. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting Bandwidth in the Vertical menu. The TDS 794D has TWEnty,
ONEFifty, and FULl settings with the P6339A probe, and it has FULl without the probe.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: CH<x>:BANdwidth { TWEnty | HUNdred | ONEFifty | TWOfifty | FULl }
Syntax 2: CH<x>:BANdwidth?
Argument 1: TWEnty sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz (requires a P6339A probe on the
TDS 794D).
Argument 2: HUNdred sets the channel bandwidth to 100 MHz (TDS 400A & 510A)
Argument 2: ONEFifty sets the channel bandwidth to 150 MHz (TDS 794D with P6339A only)
Argument 3: TWOfifty sets the channel bandwidth to 250 MHz (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D).
Argument 4: FULl sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the oscilloscope.
Example 1: CH2:BANDWIDTH TWENTY
sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz.
Example 2: CH1:BANDWIDTH?
might return FULL, which indicates that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 1.
110
CH<x>:COUPling
Description: Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified channel.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting Coupling in the Vertical menu.
Group: Vertical
Related Commands: CH<x>:IMPedance
Syntax 1: CH<x>:COUPling { AC | DC | GND }
Syntax 2: CH<x>:COUPling?
Argument 1: AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling. TDS 794D oscilloscopes require a
P6339A probe to use AC coupling.
Argument 2: DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling.
Argument 3: GND sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat ground-level waveform will be
displayed.
Example 1: CH1:COUPLING AC
sets AC coupling on channel 1.
Example 2: CH3:COUPLING?
might return DC, indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling.
111
CH<x>:DESKew
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the deskew time for this channel. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Deskew in the Vertical menu and entering a value with the keypad or general
purpose knob.
Deskew allows you to compensate for time delay differences caused by signals coming in from
cables of different length.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and return values.
However, this deskew feature will not actually work while extended-acquisition-length mode is on.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>
Syntax 2: CH<x>:DESKew?
Argument: <NR3> is the deskew time for this channel. The range is -25.0 ns to +25.0 ns with a
resolution of 1 ps. Out of range values are clipped.
112
CH<x>:IMPedance
Description: Sets or queries the impedance setting at the specified input channel. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting Impedance in the Ch<x> Coupling Impedance side menu.
TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D: When you attach an active 50 ohm probe to an input channel, the
oscilloscope reduces the maximum vertical scale from 10 V to 1 V per division. For example, an
active 10X probe would provide 10 V per division and a passive 10X probe would provide 100 V
per division.
Group: Vertical
Related Commands: CH<x>:COUPling
Syntax 1: CH<x>:IMPedance { FIFty | MEG }
Syntax 2: CH<x>:IMPedance?
Argument 1: FIFty sets the specified channel to 50 ohm impedance. Fifty is not available on a
TDS 794D if a P6339A probe is attached.
Argument 2: MEG sets the specified channel to 1 M-ohm impedance. Meg is not available on a
TDS 794D unless a P6339A probe is attached.
Example 1: CH1:IMPEDANCE FIFty
establishes 50 ohm impedance on channel 1.
Example 2: CH3:IMPEDANCE?
might return MEG, indicating that channel 3 is set to 1 M-ohm impedance.
113
CH<x>:OFFSet
Description: Sets or queries the offset, in volts, that is subtracted from the specified input
channel before it is acquired. The greater the offset, the lower on the display the waveform
appears. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Offset in the Vertical menu.
Group: Vertical
Related Commands: CH<x>:POSition
Syntax 1: CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2: CH<x>:OFFSet?
Argument: <NR3> is the desired offset in volts. The range is dependent on the scale and the
probe attenuation factor. The offset ranges are shown below.
Table 2-25: Offset Ranges for the TDS 400A, 510A, 540D, 600B, 754D, & 784D (All Channels)
and the TDS 520D & 724D (Channel 1 & Channel 2) using a 1x Probe
====================================
CH<x>:SCAle
OFFSet Range
----------------------------------------------------------------1 mV/div - 99.5 mV/div
+-1 V
100 mV/div - 995 mV/div
+-10 V
1 V/div - 10 V/div
+100 V
====================================
Table 2-26: Offset Ranges for the TDS 520D & 724D (Aux 1 & Aux 2) using a 1x Probe
====================================
CH<x>:SCAle
OFFSet Range
---------------------------------------------------------------50 mV/div & 100 mV/div
+-0.5 V
500 mV/div & 1 V/div
+-5.0 V
5 V/div & 10 V/div
+50 V
====================================
Table 2-27: Offset Ranges for the TDS 794D
========================================================================
TDS 794D
TDS 794D with P6339A Probe
CH<x>:SCAle
OFFSet Range
CH<x>:SCAle
OFFSet Range
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10 mV/div & 50 mV/div
+-0.5 V
10 mV/div & 500 mV/div
+-10.0 V
50.5 mV/div & 100 mV/div +-0.25 V
501 mV/div & 5 V/div
+-100.0 V
101 V/div & 500 mV/div
+5 V
5.01 V/div & 100 V/div
+1000 V
505 mV/div & 1 V/div
+2.5 V
========================================================================
Example 1: CH1:OFFSET 0.5E+00
lowers the channel 1 displayed waveform by 0.5 volts.
Example 2: CH1:OFFSET?
might return 500.0E-3, indicating that the current channel 1 offset is 0.5 volts.
114
CH<x>:POSition
Description: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel. The position value is
applied to the signal before it is digitized. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Position
in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical Position knob.
Group: Vertical
Related Command: CH<x>:OFFSet
Syntax 1: CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2: CH<x>:POSition?
Argument: <NR3> is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule. The range is + or
- 5 divisions.
Example 1: CH2:POSITION 1.3E+00
positions the channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions above the center of the display.
Example 2: CH1:POSITION?
might return -1.3E+00, indicating that the current position of channel 1 is at -1.3 divisions.
115
CH<x>:PROBE?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the attenuation factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: CH<x>:PROBE?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: CH4:PROBE?
might return 100.0E-3 for a 10x probe.
116
CH<x>:PROBECal?
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Queries the probe cal status for the selected channel.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: CH<x>:PROBECal?
Output 1: FALl signifies that probe cal has failed for the selected channel.
Output 2: INIT signifies the probe cal has not yet been run for the selected channel.
Output 3: PASS signifies that probe cal has passed for the selected channel.
Example: CH2: PROBECAL?
might return PASS indicating that probe cal has passed for channel 2.
117
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten:<NR3>
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Sets and queries the external attenuation for the specified channel to the specified
value. This command deals with the attenuation factor rather than the gain factor. This is unlike
the CH<x>:PROBE? command.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten:<NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the attenuation value specified as a multiplier in the range 1.00E-6 to
1.00E+6. The default is 1.00.
Example: CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 15.00E+0
sets the external attenuation to 15X.
118
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTBatten:<NR3>
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Sets and queries the external attenuation for the specified channel to the specified
value in dB. Note that 1X = 0dB, 10X = 20 dB, 100X = 40 dB, etc..
Group: Vertical
Syntax: CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTBatten:<NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the attenuation value specified in the range -120.00 dB to 120.00 dB. The
default is 0.00 dB.
Example: CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTDB 2.5
sets the external attenuation to 2.5 dB.
119
CH<x>:SCAle
Description: Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Fine Scale in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical SCALE
knob.
Group: Vertical
Related Command: CH1:VOLts
Syntax 1: CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: CH<x>:SCAle?
Argument: <NR3> is the gain in volts per division. The range is 1 mV per division to 10 V per
division when using a 1x probe, except for the TDS 794D. The range for the TDS 794D is 10 mV
per division to 1 V per division when using a 1x probe, and it is 10 mV per division to 100 V per
division when using a P6339A probe.
Example 1: CH4:SCALE 100E-03
sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.
Example 2: CH2:SCALE?
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of channel 2 is 1 V per
division.
120
CH<x>:VOLts
Description: Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. This command is identical
to the CH<x>:SCAle command and is included for compatibility purposes. Only. CH<x>:SCAle is
returned in response to a CH<x>? query.
Group: Vertical
Related Command: CH1:SCAle
Syntax 1: CH<x>:VOLts <NR3>
Syntax 2: CH<x>:VOLts?
Example 1: CH4:VOLTS 100E-03
sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.
Example 2: CH2:VOLTS?
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of channel 2 is 1 V per
division.
121
CLEARMenu
(No Query Form)
Description: Clears the current menu from the display. Sending this command is equivalent to
pressing the CLEAR MENU button on the front panel.
Group: Display
Syntax: CLEARMenu
Example: CLEARMENU
clears the menu from the display.
122
*CLS
(No Query Form)
Description: Clears the oscilloscope status data structures.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax: *CLS
The *CLS command clears the following:
o the Event Queue
o the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
o the Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit; see below)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte
Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates information is in the output queue. The device
clear (DCL) GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear
the output queue or MAV. (A complete discussion of these registers and bits, and of event
handling in general, begins in the section on Status and Events.)
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This will happen if a
hardcopy output or single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the *CLS
command is executed.
123
CURSor?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all current cursor settings.
Group: Cursor
Syntax: CURSor?
Example: CURSOR?
might return :CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;
POSITION1 500.0E-6;POSITION2 4.50E-3;SELECT CURSOR1;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.20E+0;POSITION2 -3.20E+0;
SELECT CURSOR1
as the current cursor settings.
124
CURSor:FUNCtion
Description: Selects and displays the cursor type. Cursors are attached to the selected
waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Function in the Cursor menu.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: SELect:CONTROl
Syntax 1: CURSor:FUNCtion { HBArs | OFF | VBArs | PAIred }
Syntax 2: CURSor:FUNCtion?
Argument 1: HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure volts.
Argument 2: OFF removes the cursors from the display.
Argument 3: VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time.
Argument 4: PAIred specifies paired cursors that measure both time and volts.
Example: CURSOR:FUNCtion VBARS
selects vertical bar type cursors.
125
CURSor:HBArs?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors.
Group: Cursor
Syntax: CURSor:HBArs?
Example: CURSOR:HBARS?
might return :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 0;POSITION2 0;SELECT CURSOR1.
126
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the voltage difference between the two horizontal bar cursors.
Group: Cursor
Syntax: CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.
127
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Description: Positions a horizontal bar cursor.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2: CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the cursor position relative to ground, in volts.
Example 1: CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3
positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25.0 mV.
Example 2: CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that one of the horizontal bar cursors is at -64.0 mV.
128
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Sets or queries the position of the horizontal cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in units of %
of vertical range.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>
Syntax 2: CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?
Argument: <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100(%). If specifies the cursor position relative to the
vertical range of the selected waveform.
Example: CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the vertical range of the
selected waveform.
129
CURSor:HBArs:SELect
Description: Selects which horizontal bar cursor is active for front-panel control. The active
cursor will be displayed as a solid horizontal line and can be moved using the front-panel general
purpose knob when the cursor menu is active. The unselected cursor will be displayed as a
dashed horizontal line. Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the SELECT button on
the front panel when the Cursor menu is displayed.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:HBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }
Syntax 2: CURSor:HBArs:SELect?
Argument 1: CURSOR1 selects the first horizontal bar cursor.
Argument 2: CURSOR2 selects the second horizontal bar cursor.
Example 1: CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT CURSOR1
selects the first horizontal bar cursor as the active cursor.
Example 2: CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT?
returns CURSOR1 when the first cursor is the active cursor.
130
CURSor:HBArs:UNITS
Description: Sets or queries the units for the horizontal bar cursors. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Amplitude in the Cursor menu.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:HBArs:UNITS { BASe | IRE }
Syntax 2: CURSor:HBArs:UNITS?
Argument 1: BASe specifies base as the unit of measure.
Argument 2: IRE specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with video
signals.
Example 1: CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE
sets the units for the horizontal bar cursors to base.
Example 2: CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS?
returns IRE when the horizontal bar cursor units are IRE.
131
CURSor:MODe
Description: Selects whether the two cursors move together in unison or separately.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax 1: CURSor:MODe { TRACk | INDependent }
Syntax 2: CURSor:MODe?
Argument 1: TRACk ties the two cursors together as you move the general purpose knob.
Argument 2: INDependent frees the two cursors to move separately.
Example 1: CURSOR:MODE TRACK
specifies that the cursors positions move in unison.
Example 2: CURSOR:MODE?
might return :TRACK showing the two cursors move in unison.
132
CURSor:PAIred
Description: Positions the paired cursors. Also, returns the current paired cursor settings.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the cursors are limited to the waveform record section of the
acquisition data.
Group: Cursor
Related Commands: DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP
Syntax 1: CURSor:PAIred:SNAp
Syntax 2: CURSor:PAIred?
Argument: SNAp positions the paired cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
Example 1: CURSOR:PAIRED:SNAP
specifies the positions of the cursors are at the current DATA:START and DATA:STOP values.
Example 2: CURSOR:PAIRED?
might return
:CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE;POSITION1 -2.00E-3;POSITION2 2.00E-3;SELECT
CURSOR2
133
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA
(Query Only)
Description: Queries the hbar (voltage) distance between the first and second paired cursor. This
is the absolute value of the vertical position of the first cursor minus the vertical position of the
second cursor.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax: CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
Example: CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA?
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.
134
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1
(Query Only)
Description: Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the first paired cursor.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax: CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?
Example: CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that the first cursor is at -64.0 mV.
135
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2
(Query Only)
Description: Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the second paired cursor.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax: CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2?
Example: CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating the second cursor is at -64.0 mV.
136
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
Description: Sets or queries the vertical bar (time) position of the first or second paired cursor. x
is either 1 or 2 and refers to the first or second cursor.
The CURSor:VBArs:UNITS command specifies the units for these cursors.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the paired cursor position must be within the waveform
record (as opposed to the entire extended acquisition length) for any change to happen.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion, CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
Syntax 1: CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x> < NR3 >
Syntax 2: CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
command.
The position can appear in units of second, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line numbers (with option
05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of clocks or 1/clocks.
Example 1: CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 9.00E-6
specifies the first paired cursor is at 9 us.
Example 2: CURSOR:POSITION1?
might return 1.00E-6, indicating that the first paired cursor is at 1 us.
137
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Sets or queries the horizontal position of the paired cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in
units of % of record length.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt < NR3 >
Syntax 2: CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt?
Argument: <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the
record length of the selected waveform.
Example: CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1 indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record length of the
selected waveform.
138
CURSor:PAIred:SELect
Description: Selects the active paired cursor. The active cursor appears as a solid vertical line.
The unselected cursor appears as a dashed vertical line. Sending this command is equivalent to
pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor menu is displayed.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:PAIred:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }
Syntax 2: CURSor:PAIred:SELect?
Argument 1: CURSOR1 specifies the first paired cursor.
Argument 2: CURSOR2 specifies the second paired cursor.
Example 1: CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT CURSOR2
selects the second paired cursor as the active cursor.
Example 2: CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT?
returns CURSOR1 when the first paired cursor is the active cursor.
139
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS
Description: Sets or queries the units for the paired cursors. Sending this command is equivalent
to setting Amplitude in the Cursor menu.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:PAIred:UNITS { BASe | IRE }
Syntax 2: CURSor:PAIred:UNITS?
Argument 1: BASe specifies base as the unit of measure.
Argument 2: IRE specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with video
signals.
Example 1: CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE
sets the units for the paired cursors to base.
Example 2: CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS?
returns IRE when the paired cursor units are IRE.
140
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA
(Query Only)
Description: Queries the vbar (time) distance between paired cursors. It returns the absolute
value of the first cursor less the second cursor horizontal positions.
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line numbers (with option
05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of clocks or 1/clocks.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax: CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
Example: CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA?
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the paired cursors is 1.064 seconds.
141
CURSor:VBArs
Description: Positions the vertical bar cursors and the CURSor:VBArs? query returns the current
vertical bar cursor settings for horizontal position, delta, cursor selection, and units.
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line numbers (with option
05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of clocks or 1/clocks.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the cursors are limited to the waveform record section of the
acquisition data.
Group: Cursor
Related Commands: DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, MEASUrement:GATing
Syntax 1: CURSor:VBArs SNAp
Syntax 2: CURSor:VBArs?
Argument: SNAp positions the vertical bar cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
Example 1: CURSOR:VBARS SNAP
specifies that the cursors positions are the same as the current DATA:START and DATA:STOP
values.
Example 2: CURSOR:VBARS?
might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.00E-6;POSITION2 9.00E-6;SELECT
CURSOR2.
142
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the time or frequency between the two vertical bar cursors. The units,
seconds or Hertz, are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line numbers (with option
05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of clocks or 1/clocks.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
Syntax: CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: CURSOR:VBARS:DELTa?
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1.064
seconds.
143
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Description: Positions a vertical bar cursor for both vertical bar and paired cursors. The
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS command specifies units.
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line numbers (with option
05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of clocks or 1/clocks.
Group: Cursor
Related Command: CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
Syntax 1: CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2: CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS command. The position is relative to the trigger position.
Example 1: CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 9.00E-6
positions one of the vertical bar cursors at 9 ms.
Example 2: CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1?
might return 1.00E-6, indicating a vertical bar cursors is at 1 ms.
144
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Sets or queries the position of the vertical cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in units of % of
record length.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>
Syntax 2: CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?
Argument: <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100(%). If specifies the cursor position relative to the
record length of the selected waveform.
Example: CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record length of the
selected waveform.
145
CURSor:VBArs:SELect
Description: Selects which vertical bar cursor is active. The active cursor will be displayed as a
solid vertical line and can be moved using the front-panel general purpose knob when the cursor
menu is active. The unselected cursor will be displayed as a dashed vertical line. Sending this
command is equivalent to pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor menu
is displayed.
Group: Cursor
Syntax 1: CURSor:VBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }
Syntax 2: CURSor:VBArs:SELect?
Argument 1: CURSOR1 specifies the first vertical bar cursor.
Argument 2: CURSOR2 specifies the second vertical bar cursor.
Example 1: CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT CURSOR2
selects the second vertical bar cursor as the active cursor.
Example 2: CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT?
returns CURSOR1 when the first vertical bar cursor is the active cursor.
146
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS
Description: Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Time Units (Horiz Units in the TDS 400A) in the Cursor menu.
Group: Cursor
Related Command:
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Syntax 1: CURSor:VBArs:UNITS { SECOnds | HERtz | LINE (with option 05) | BASe (TDS 400A
only) | INVert (TDS 400A only) }
Syntax 2: CURSor:VBArs:UNITS?
Argument 1: SEConds specifies seconds as the unit of measure. For the TDS 400A, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 400A receives this argument, it will
convert it to BASE or INVERT depending on the selected waveform. The TDS 400A will not output
this argument in response to a query.
Argument 2: HERtz specifies hertz as the unit of measure. For the TDS 400A, this argument is
available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 400A receives this argument, it will convert it to
BASE or INVERT depending on the selected waveform. The TDS 400A will not output this
argument in response to a query.
Argument 3: LINE specifies a video line as the unit of measure. This is most useful if you have
option 05 video trigger installed. On some models, if you do not have option 05, use of this
argument will generate an error message. On the TDS 400A, if you do not have option 05, the
TDS 400A will use the NTSC standard for converting from time to lines. In order for the
measurement to be accurate in the TDS 400A when TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM is set to
custom, you must set TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD.
Argument 4: BASe (TDS 400A only) specifies the base (or natural) units of the waveform as the
unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are seconds. If external clock is
enabled, the base units are clocks.
Argument 5: INVert (TDS 400A only) specifies 1/base (or natural) units of the waveform as the
unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are 1/seconds. If external clock is
enabled, the base units are 1/clocks.
Example 1: CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to seconds.
Example 2: CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS?
returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are hertz.
147
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?
(TDS 400A Only) (Query Only)
Description: Queries the unit string as shown on screen for the vertical bar cursor readout.
Group: Cursor
Syntax: CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?
Example: CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTRING?
might returns "ms", indicating the units are milliseconds.
148
CURVe
Description: Transfers waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format.
Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble which contains
information such as data format and scale. Refer to the WFMPre command description for
information about the waveform preamble. The data format is specified by the DATa:ENCdg and
DATa:WIDTH commands.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the query form of this command can transfer acquisition
record (as opposed to waveform) data from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format. Of course,
to do this, you must specify a valid channel with the DATa:SOUrce command.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. If more than one source is specified, a comma separated list of data
blocks is returned. The first and last data points that are transferred are specified by the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument. The data is stored in the
reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination starting with the data point specified
by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be transferred at a time. The waveform will only be
displayed if the reference is displayed.
A description of the waveform transfer process starts in the section on the waveform command
group.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa, WFMPre
Syntax 1: CURVe { <Block> | <asc curve> }
Syntax 2: CURVe?
Argument: <Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:
#<x><yyy><data><newline> where <x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy> = 500,
then <x> = 3. <yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer including checksum. If width is 1 then all
bytes on the bus are single data points. If width is 2 then all bytes on the bus are 2-byte pairs. Use
the DATa:WIDth command to set the width. <data> is the curve data. <newline> is a single byte
newline character at the end of the data. See the GETWFM.C or GETWFM.BAS examples in the
accompanying disk for more specifics.
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data is <NR1>[,<NR1>...]
where each <NR1> represents a data point.
Example: CURVE?
might return, for ASCII data:
CURVE 0,0,0,0,-1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,-1, -1,1,0,0,0,-1,0,0,1,0,1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0
149
DATa
Description: Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with
the CURVe command. Since DATa:DESTination and DATa:TARget are equivalent, only
DATa:DESTination is returned by the DATa? query.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: CURVE, WAVFrm
Syntax 1: DATa { INIT | SNAp | RECORDSNAp (TDS 500D & 700D) }
Syntax 2: DATa?
Argument 1: INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
Argument 2: SNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current vertical bar cursor
positions.
Argument 3: RECORDSNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP for the first and last points of
the selected channel’s waveform/extended acquisition. When extended acquisition length (2M,
4M, and 8M) mode is on and the selected channel is a live channel, this is how to set up to get a
waveform’s data over GPIB. It also works when extended acquisition length mode is off.
Example 1: DATA SNAP
assigns the current position of the vertical bar cursors to DATA:START and DATA:STOP.
Example 2: DATA?
might return the string
:DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY;DESTINATION REF4; SOURCE REF4;START 1;STOP
500;WIDTH 2
150
DATa:DESTination
Description: Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing waveform data that is
transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command. This command is identical to the
DATa:TARget command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: DATa:DESTination REF<x>
Syntax 2: DATa:DESTination?
Argument: REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF4) is the reference memory location where the
waveform will be stored.
This means that you cannot have a channel as a destination. This is true even for extendedacquisition-length mode.
Example 1: DATA DESTINATION REF3
stores incoming waveform data in reference memory 3.
Example 2: DATA:DESTINATION?
might return REF2 as the reference memory location that is currently selected.
151
DATa:ENCdg
Description: Sets or queries the format of the waveform data. This command is equivalent to
setting WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, and WFMPre:BYT_Or as shown in Table 2-27.
Setting the DATa:ENCdg value causes the corresponding WFMPre values to be updated and vice
versa.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN.FMT, WFMPre:BYT_Or
Syntax 1: DATa:ENCdg { ASCIi | RIBinary | RPBinary | SRIbinary | SRPbinary}
Syntax 2: DATa:ENCdg?
Argument 1: ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer (RIBinary) data. If this is
the value at power-on, the WFMPre values for BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, and ENCdg are set as RP,
MSB, and ASC respectively.
Argument 2: RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most significant
byte transferred first. This format results in the fastest data transfer rate when DATa:WIDth is set
to 2.
The range is -128 to 127 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Center screen is zero. The range is -32768 to
32767 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the
lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.
Argument 3: RPBinary specifies positive integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
The range is 0 to 255 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Center screen is 127. The range is 0 to 65,535
when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower
limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.
Argument 4: SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped, meaning
that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data to
IBM compatible PCs.
Argument 5: SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped, meaning
that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data to
IBM compatible PCs.
Table 2-27: DATa and WFMPre Parameter Settings
=========================================
WFMPre Settings
DATa:ENCdg Setting
:ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or
-------------------------------------------------------------------------ASCIi
ASC
N/A
N/A
RIBinary
BIN
RI
MSB
RPBinary
BIN
RP
MSB
SRIbinary
BIN
RI
LSB
SRPbinary
BIN
RP
LSB
=========================================
152
Example 1: DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY
sets the data encoding format to be positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred
first.
Example 2: DATA:ENCDG?
might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data.
153
DATa:SOUrce
Description: Sets or queries the location of the waveform data that is transferred from the
instrument by the CURVe? query. The source data is always transferred in a predefined order
regardless of the order they are specified using this command. The predefined order is CH1
through CH4, MATH1 through MATH3, and then REF1 through REF4.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the MATH1 through MATH3 sources can not be used. Also,
in this mode, CH1 through CH4 refer to extended-acquisition-length data. In contrast, when not in
extended-acquisition-length mode, CH1 through CH4 refer only to the waveform record.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<Comma><wfm>]...
Syntax 2: DATa:SOUrce?
Argument: <wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the
oscilloscope to the controller.
Example 1: DATA:SOURCE REF2, CH2, MATH1, CH1
specifies that four waveforms will be transferred in the next CURVE? query. The order that the
data will be transferred is CH1, CH2, MATH1, and then REF2.
Example 2: DATA:SOURCE?
might return REF3, indicating the source for the waveform data that is transferred using a
CURVE? query.
154
DATa:STARt
Description: Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer. This command allows
for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: CURVe?, DATa:STOP
Syntax 1: DATa:STARt <NR1>
Syntax 2: DATa:STARt?
Argument: <NR1> ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the first data point that will be
transferred. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record length, whichever is
less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length then no data will be transferred.
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal DATa:STARt +
(DATa:STARt - DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt = 30 and DATa:STOP = 20, then the
range of data points for the waveform transfer will equal 30 through 40.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> ranges up to the extended acquisition length as
opposed to the record length.
Example 1: DATA:START 10
specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.
Example 2: DATA:START?
might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be transferred.
155
DATa:STOP
Description: Sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe?
query. This allows the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller.
When using the CURVe command, the oscilloscope will stop reading data when there is no more
data to read or when the specified record length has been reached so this command will be
ignored.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: CURVe?
Syntax 1: DATa:STOP <NR1>
Syntax 2: DATa:STOP?
Argument: <NR1> ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the last data point that will be
transferred. If <NR1> is greater than the record length then data will be transferred up to the
record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are greater than the record length, an
execution error will be executed.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, just set DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to
the maximum record length.
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal DATa:STARt +
(DATa:STARt - DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt = 30 and DATa:STOP = 20, then the
range of data points for the waveform transfer will equal 30 through 40.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> ranges up to the extended acquisition length as
opposed to the record length.
Example 1: DATA:STOP 15000
specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000.
Example 2: DATA:STOP?
might return 14900 as the last data point that will be transferred.
156
DATa:TARget
Description: Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred to the instrument
using the CURVe command. This command is equivalent to the DATa:DESTINATION command
and is included for compatibility with older Tektronix instruments.
Group: Waveform
Related Command: CURVe
Syntax 1: DATa:TARget REF<x>
Syntax 2: DATa:TARget?
157
DATa:WIDth
Description: Sets the number of bytes per data point in the waveform transferred using the
CURVe command.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: CURVe, WFMPre:BIT_Nr, WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Syntax 1: DATa:WIDth <NR1>
Syntax 2: DATa:WIDth?
Argument: <NR1> = 1 specifies that there is 1 byte (8 bits) per point. This format is useful when
the acquisition mode is set to SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKdetect (one byte per point). If used for
AVErage or HIRes (two bytes per point), the low order byte is not transmitted.
<NR1> = 2 specifies that there are 2 bytes (16 bits) per point. This format is useful for AVErage
and HIRes (two bytes per point) waveform. If used for ENVelope, PEAKdetect, or SAMple (one
byte per point), the least significant byte is always zero.
Example: DATA:WIDth 1
sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.
158
DATE
Description: Sets or queries the date that the oscilloscope can display.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: DISplay, CLOCk, TIMe
Syntax 1: DATE <QString>
Syntax 2: DATE?
Argument: <QString> is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd".
mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12.
dd refers to a two-digit day number in the month.
yyyy refers to a four-digit year number.
There must a dash (-) after the yyyy and after the mm.
Example: DATE "1993-01-24"
specifies that the date is set to January 24th, 1993.
159
*DDT
Description: Allows the user to specify a command or a list of commands that are executed
when the instrument receives a *TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message. *DDT is
just a special alias that *TRG uses.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: ALIAS:DEFINE, *TRG
Syntax 1: *DDT { <Block> | <QString> }
Syntax 2: *DDT?
Argument: <Block> or <QString>
is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can contain only valid commands
that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (see
page ). The sequence must be < or = 80 characters. <Block> format is always returned as a query
response.
Example: *DDT #0ACQUIRE:STATE RUN;BELL<EOI>
specifies that the acquisition system will be started and the bell rings each time a *TRG command
is sent.
160
DELEte:SETUp
(No Query Form)
Description: Removes stored setups from memory and initializes the location with the factory
default setup.
NOTE: The setup information cannot be recovered once it has been deleted.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV,
SAVe:SETUp, TEKSecure
Syntax: DELEte:SETUp { <NR1> | ALL }
Argument 1: <NR1> is a value in the range 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location. Using
an out-of-range value causes an execution error.
Argument 2: ALL specifies all the stored setups.
Example: DELETE:SETUP ALL
removes all stored setups. All ten storage locations are initialized to the factory default setup.
161
DELEte:WAVEform
(No Query Form)
Description: Deletes one or all of the stored reference waveforms from memory. The memory
allocated for the reference location is then available for reallocation. Memory must be reallocated
for the deleted references before any waveform data can be stored in the reference location.
NOTE: The waveform data is not actually cleared from the reference location.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: RECAll:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform, TEKSecure
Syntax: DELEte:WAVEform { REF<x> | ALL }
Argument 1: REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF) specifies one of the reference memory
locations.
Argument 2: ALL specifies all the stored waveforms.
Example 1: DELETE:WAVEFORM ALL
removes all the waveforms stored in reference memory.
Example 2: DELETE:WAVEFORM REF2
removes the waveform stored at REF2.
162
DESE
Description: Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). The
DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status
Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a more detailed discussion of the use of
these registers, see the Registers section of this document.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: *CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1: DESE <NR1>
Syntax 2: DESE?
Argument: <NR1>
is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value.
For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 (that is, the most
significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0,
etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the DESER maintains its
value through a power cycle.
NOTE: Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be
entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register.
Use the *ESE command to set the ESER. A discussion of event handling begins on page .
Example 1: DESE 209
sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and
OPC bits.
Example 2: DESE?
might return the string :DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010.
163
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the pass/fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution. The
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query can be used to determine which test(s) has failed.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Argument 1: PASS indicating that all of the selected diagnostic tests have passed.
Argument 2: FAIl indicating that at least one of the selected diagnostic tests has failed.
Example: DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?
returns either PASS or FAIl.
164
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution.
The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass/fail
status of each.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Returns: <QString> in the following format:
<Status>,<Module name>[,<Status>,<Module name>...]
Example: DIAG:RESULT:LOG?
might return
:DIAG:RESULT:LOG "pass--Processor,pass--Display,pass--FP/Proc
Interface,FAIL--Front Panel"
165
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition
(No Query Form)
Description: Selects the acquisition system test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Area in the Utility
menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition ALL
Argument: ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.
166
DIAg:SELect:ALL
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies that all system test sequences will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Area in the Utility
menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL
Argument: ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests for the acquisition, processor and
display systems, and self diagnostics for the front panel.
167
DIAg:SELect:CPU
(No Query Form)
Description: Selects the processor system test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Area in the Utility
menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:SELect:CPU ALL
Argument: ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.
168
DIAg:SELect:DISplay
(No Query Form)
Description: Selects the display system test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Area in the Utility
menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:SELect:DISplay ALL
Argument: ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.
169
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel
(No Query Form)
Description: Selects the front-panel test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Area in the Utility
menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:SELect:FPAnel ALL
Argument: ALL selects self diagnostic tests.
170
DIAg:STATE
(No Query Form)
Description: Executes the diagnostic tests that have been specified with the DIAg:SELect
commands.
When the test sequence has completed, any of the modules or module interfaces that failed
diagnostics are displayed on the screen and stored in an internal log file. The pass/fail status will
be returned by the DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query, and the internal log will be returned by
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query. Sending this command is equivalent to running Extended Diagnostics
by selecting Execute in the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.
NOTE: The DIAg:STATE EXECute command can take 30 seconds or more to respond. This
command performs a warm boot and does not return control to the instrument controller until
diagnostics are complete.
Group: Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax: DIAg:STATE EXECute
Argument: EXECute runs the diagnostic test sequences specified by the DIAg:SELect
commands. When complete, the oscilloscope will return to the state it was in just prior to the test.
If the PON event was enabled before running the tests, a Service Request will be generated.
When the Service Request has been received, the pass/fail status of the tests can be returned by
executing the DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query.
The DIAg:STATE EXECute command clears the following locations:
•
the Event Queue
•
the Input Queue
•
the Status Registers (SESR and SBR)
To enable a power-on event to generate a Service Request, send the following commands before
running diagnostics:
•
DESE 128
•
*ESE 128
•
*SRE 32
•
*PSC 0
Example: DIAg:STATE EXECUTE
executes all the diagnostic tests that have been selected.
171
DISplay?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the current display settings.
Group: Display
Syntax: DISplay?
Example: DISPLAY?
might return :DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;FILTER SINX;PERSISTENCE
500.0E-3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 70;TEXT
60;CONTRAST 150
172
DISplay:CLOCk
Description: Controls the display of the date and time. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting Display Date/Time in the Readout Options side menu. The query form returns an ON (1)
or an OFF (0).
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:CLOCk { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:CLOCk?
Argument 1: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the clock from the display.
Argument 2: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 displays the clock on the display.
Example 1: DISPLAY:CLOCK ON
sets the display to show time and date.
Example 2: DISPLAY:CLOCK?
might return 1
indicating that the display shows time and date.
173
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Turns on or off the collision contrast option. The TDS will display overlapping lines in
a special collision color when this item is turned on. Sending this command is equivalent to
selecting Options from the main Color menu and toggling Collision Contrast in the resulting side
menu to ON or OFF.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast?
Argument 1: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turns off collision contrast.
Argument 2: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on collision contrast.
Example: DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST ON
turns on the contrast option.
174
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>:BYCONTents
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Determines if the color for a math or reference waveform is set to the color assigned
to the waveform contents (the constituent waveform) or to a specific color index. Sending this
command is equivalent to pressing Map Math Colors or Map Reference Colors on the Color
main menu and Color Matches Contents (to select the on state) or Color (to select the off state)
on the resulting side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |
REF4 }:BYCONTents { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |
REF4 }:BYCONTents?
Argument 1: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 means set the color by index (NOT by
contents).
Argument 2: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 means set the color by contents (NOT by
index).
Example 1: DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS ON
sets the display of math waveform # 1 to the color of the waveform used to define math waveform
# 1. If two waveforms were used to defined math waveform # 1, then the color of the first
mentioned waveform is used.
Example 2: DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS?
might return ON.
175
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>:TO
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Defines the color index to use if setting the color for a math or reference waveform
to the color assigned to a specific index. This is similar, but not identical, to pressing Map Math
Colors or Map Reference Colors on the Color main menu, pressing Color on the resulting side
menu, and entering an index with the general purpose knob or the keypad. The difference is that,
when you press Color on the front panel, you not only select a color index but also state that you
wish to select by index rather than by contents. In contrast, when you use this command you only
select the index to use. To state you wish to select by index, use the
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:...:BYCONTents
command with the OFF argument.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 | REF4 }:TO {
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:MAP:TO?
Example 1: DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO CH3
sets the color of math waveform # 1 to that assigned to channel 3.
This assumes that Color Matches Contents is set to OFF.
Example 2: DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO?
might return CH3.
176
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the current persistence palette to one of the preset persistence palettes.
Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Palette from the main Color menu, Persistence
Palettes from the resulting side menu, and Temperature, Spectral, or Gray Scale from the next
side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence { TEMPErature | SPECTral | GRAYscale }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence?
Example: DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE TEMPERATURE
sets temperature palette as the current persistence palette.
177
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<persistPalette>:P<x>
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the hue, lightness, and saturation values for persistence palette color indexes.
Group: Display
Syntax: 1: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ GRAYscale | SPECTral | TEMPErature }:P<x> {
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> | RESET}
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte: :{ GRAYscale | SPECTral | TEMPErature }:P<x> {
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> | RESET}?
Argument 1: BACKGround specifies the display background color.
Argument 2: CH1 specifies the channel 1 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 3: CH2 specifies the channel 2 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 4: CH3 specifies the channel 3 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 5: CH4 specifies the channel 4 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 6: MATH specifies the default math waveforms and associated text color.
Argument 7: REF specifies the default reference waveforms and associated text color.
Argument 8: TEXt specifies the text color in all menus and all readouts not associated with a
waveform.
Argument 9: SCROLLTEXT specifies text in the scroll bar. For example, this covers the scroll
bars used in the file system.
Argument 10: ZONe specifies the color of the intensified zone on the waveform when the time
base is intensified and the color of the real samples when the display style is Intensified
Samples.
Argument 11: COLLision specifies the color of the areas where waveforms overlap each other.
You can turn collision marking on or off with the Items, Waveforms, Options, Collision Contrast
menu item.
Argument 12: GRAticule specifies the color of the graticule. Use the Settings, Display,
Graticule option to select the graticule type.
Argument 13: SCROLLBAR specifies the color of the scrollbar. For example, you will find a
scrollbar in various file system menus.
Argument 14: HISTOMASK (TDS 700D) specifies the color of the histogram’s box, the histogram
itself, and masks, in the different palettes.
Argument 15: <NR1>, <NR1>, <NR1> specifies the desired colors in terms of hue, lightness and
saturation values.
178
Hue is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface. It varies continuously along the color
spectrum as produced by a rainbow. Values range from 0 to 359. Sample values are: 0 = blue, 60
= magenta, 120 = red, 180 = yellow, 240 = green, 360 = cyan.
Lightness refers to the amount of light reflected from the surface. It varies from black, to the
nominal color, to white. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 0 results in black. A value of 50
provides the nominal color. A value of 100 results in white.
Saturation is the intensity of color. Completely desaturated color is gray. Completely saturated
color of any hue is that color at its most intense. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 100
provides a pure color. A value of 0 provides gray.
Example: DISPLAY:COLOr:PALEtte:HARDCOPY:CH1 120,50,100 sets the CH1 color of the
hardcopy palette to 120 hue, 50 lightness, and 100 saturation. This provides a pure red.
179
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the current palette to one of the preset palettes. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Palette from the main Color menu and Normal, Bold, Hardcopy, or
Monochrome from the resulting side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular { NORMal | BOLd | HARDCopy | MONo }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular?
Example: DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR HARDCOPY
sets the current palette to the hardcopy palette.
180
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only) (No Query Form)
Description: Restores all palettes to their factory default setting. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Restore Colors from the main Color menu and Reset All Palettes to
Factory from the resulting side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL
Example: DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL
resets the palette to the factory default setting.
181
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:RESET
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only) (No Query Form)
Description: Restores the given palette to its factory defaults. This is useful if you have edited the
colors in a palette. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Restore Colors from the
main Color menu and Reset Current Palette to Factory from the resulting side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:RESET
Example: DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:HARDCOPY:RESET
resets the hardcopy palette to its initial, factory-default settings.
182
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:<item name>
(TDS 6X4B & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the color of a selected item in a selected palette.
Group: Display
Syntax: 1: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:{ BACKGround |
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXT | SCROLLTEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule |
SCROLLBAR | HISTOMASK (TDS 700D) } { <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:{ BACKGround |
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXT | SCROLLTEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule |
SCROLLBAR | HISTOMASK (TDS 700D) }?
Argument 1: BACKGround specifies the display background color.
Argument 2: CH1 specifies the channel 1 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 3: CH2 specifies the channel 2 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 4: CH3 specifies the channel 3 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 5: CH4 specifies the channel 4 waveform and associated text color.
Argument 6: MATH specifies the default math waveforms and associated text color.
Argument 7: REF specifies the default reference waveforms and associated text color.
Argument 8: TEXt specifies the text color in all menus and all readouts not associated with a
waveform.
Argument 9: SCROLLTEXT specifies text in the scroll bar. For example, this covers the scroll
bars used in the file system.
Argument 10: ZONe specifies the color of the intensified zone on the waveform when the time
base is intensified and the color of the real samples when the display style is Intensified
Samples.
Argument 11: COLLision specifies the color of the areas where waveforms overlap each other.
You can turn collision marking on or off with the Items, Waveforms, Options, Collision Contrast
menu item.
Argument 12: GRAticule specifies the color of the graticule. Use the Settings, Display,
Graticule option to select the graticule type.
Argument 13: SCROLLBAR specifies the color of the scrollbar. For example, you will find a
scrollbar in various file system menus.
Argument 14: HISTOMASK (TDS 700D) specifies the color of the histogram’s box, the histogram
itself, and masks, in the different palettes.
Argument 15: <NR1>, <NR1>, <NR1> specifies the desired colors in terms of hue, lightness and
saturation values.
183
Hue is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface. It varies continuously along the color
spectrum as produced by a rainbow. Values range from 0 to 359. Sample values are: 0 = blue, 60
= magenta, 120 = red, 180 = yellow, 240 = green, 360 = cyan.
Lightness refers to the amount of light reflected from the surface. It varies from black, to the
nominal color, to white. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 0 results in black. A value of 50
provides the nominal color. A value of 100 results in white.
Saturation is the intensity of color. Completely desaturated color is gray. Completely saturated
color of any hue is that color at its most intense. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 100
provides a pure color. A value of 0 provides gray.
Example: DISPLAY:COLOr:PALEtte:HARDCOPY:CH1 120,50,100 sets the CH1 color of the
hardcopy palette to 120 hue, 50 lightness, and 100 saturation. This provides a pure red.
184
DISplay:FILTer
Description: Sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for the display. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting Filter in the Display menu.
Group: Display
Related Commands: DISplay:STYle
Syntax 1: DISplay:FILTer { LINEAr | SINX }
Syntax 2: DISplay:FILTer?
Argument 1: LINEAr specifies linear interpolation where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.
Argument 2: SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation where acquired points are fit to a curve.
Example 1: DISPLAY:FILTER LINEAR
sets the interpolation filter type to linear.
Example 2: DISPLAY:FILTER?
returns either LINEAR or SINX, indicating the type of interpolation filter.
185
DISplay:FORMat
Description: Sets or queries the display format. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Format in the Display menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:FORMat { XY | YT | XYZ }
Syntax 2: DISplay:FORMat?
Argument 1: XY displays the voltage of one waveform against the voltage of another. The
sources that make up an XY waveform are predefined and are listed in Table 2-28. Displaying one
source causes its corresponding source to be displayed.
Table 2-28: XY Format Pairs
================================================
X-Axis Source
Y-Axis Source
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3 (or AUX 1) (All models
Ch 4 (or AUX 2) (All models
except TDS 430A)
except TDS 430A)
Ref 1
Ref 2
Ref 3
Ref 4
================================================
Argument 2: YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the normal mode.
Argument 3: XYZ format (DPO mode only) compares the voltage levels of the CH 1 (X) and CH 2
(Y) waveform records point-by-point as in XY format. The displayed waveform intensity is
modulated by the CH 3 (Z) waveform record. XYZ format is not triggered. XYZ format is not
available on 2+2 channel oscilloscopes. If the requested record length in normal mode is large
enough so that the number of channels that are on is limited, then XYZ (and XY) will not work
even in a four channel oscilloscope. A -5 division signal (including position and offset) on CH 3
produces a blank screen; a +5 division signal produces full intensity.
Example 1: DISPLAY:FORMAT YT
selects a voltage versus time format for the display.
Example 2: DISPLAY:FORMAT?
might return XY for the display format.
186
DISplay:GRAticule
Description: Selects the type of graticule that will be displayed. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Graticule in the Display menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:GRAticule { CROSSHair | FRAme | FULl | GRId | NTSC | PAL}
Syntax 2: DISplay:GRAticule?
Argument 1: CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs.
Argument 2: FRAme specifies just a frame.
Argument 3: FULl specifies a frame, a grid, and cross hairs.
Argument 4: GRId specifies a frame and a grid.
Argument 5: NTSC specifies a special NTSC frame.
Argument 6: PAL specifies a special PAL frame.
Example 1: DISPLAY:GRATICULE GRID
sets the graticule type to display a frame and a grid.
Example 2: DISPLAY:GRATICULE?
returns FULL when all graticule elements (grid, frame, and cross hairs) are selected.
187
DISplay:INStavu:ACCUmulate
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the length of the counters in the waveform array that record the number of
times acquisition signals occur at each display pixel. DPO, mask-counting, and histogram modes
use the counters. In DPO mode, the accumulated numbers and the intensity controls determine
the gray-scale information for each displayed pixel.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:ACCUmulate { SHALlow | DEEP }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:ACCUmulate?
Argument 1: SHALlow sets the accumulation depth to 21 bits or, if histograms or mask counting
is active, 32 bits. Shallow allows the image to saturate faster.
Argument 2: DEEP sets the accumulation depth to 64 bits. Accumulation depths greater than 21
bits reduce the screen update rate, disable variable persistence and no persistence, and enable
SAve/Recall of the image array.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:ACCUmulate?
might return DEEP indicating the accumulation depth is 64 bits.
188
DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Automatically sets the display brightness in DPO mode.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright { On | Off | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:AUTOBright?
Argument 1: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 automatically sets the maximum display brightness to the
value of the most frequent event. Accumulation depths greater than 21 bits always use the ON
mode.
Argument 2: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 lets the display brightness depend on the trigger rate.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:AUTOBRIGHT?
might return 1 indicating the DPO autobright mode is on.
189
DISplay:INStavu:BRIGHTness
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the DPO mode brightness.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:BRIGHTness <NR3>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:BRIGHTness?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the brightness of DPO mode waveforms that are displayed on the
screen. The range is from 0 to 100. Higher brightness settings result in less frequent events being
more easily seen. This command has no effect on the display until/unless DISplay:INStavu:MAP
INTENSITy is selected.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:BRIGHTNESS?
might return :DISPLAY:INSTAVU:BRIGHTNESS 40.0E+0.
190
DISplay:INStavu:CONTRast
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the DPO mode contrast.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:CONTRast <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> specifies the contrast of DPO mode waveforms that are displayed on the
screen. The range is from 0 to 100. Low contrast settings makes less frequent events display at
the same brightness as frequent events. This command has no effect on the display until/unless
DISplay:INStavu:MAP INTENSITy is selected.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:CONTRAST?
might return :DISPLAY:INSTAVU:CONTRAST 10.0E+0.
191
DISplay:INStavu:MAP
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the method used to map the acquisition database to display indexes.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:MAP { PERCent | INTENSITy }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:MAP?
Argument 1: PERCent allows you to set Color Mapping percentages using the
DISplay:INStavu:PERCent command.
Argument 2: INTENSITy allows you to set the DPO mode display intensity using the DPO
Brightness and Contrast controls.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:MAP?
might return DISPLAY:INSTAVU:MAP:PERCENT indicating the DPO mode display intensity can
be set using the DISplay:INStavu:PERCent command.
192
DISplay:INStavu:PERCent:P<x>
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the maximum value for a color index when you are in the PERCENT Color
Mapping mode.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:PERCent:P<x> { <NR3> | RESET }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:PERCent:P<x>?
Argument 1: <NR3> sets the maximum percentage for a color index when the PERCENT Color
Mapping modes is selected.
Argument 2: RESET sets the maximum percentage for a color index to the factory default.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERCent:P5?
might return the value 26.667E+0, indicating the maximum percentage for color index 5 is 27.
193
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the persistence mode to use with DPO mode.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence { INFPersist | VARpersist | NOPersist }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence?
Argument 1: INFPersist accumulates data points on the display indefinitely.
Argument 2: VARpersist leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time specified
by DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist.
Argument 3: NOPersist displays only the most recent acquisition, erasing the display each time a
new waveform array is displayed.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE?
might return INFPERSIST indicating the infinite persistence mode is on.
194
DISplay:INStavu:STYle
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects how the data is displayed with DPO mode.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:STYle { DOTs | VECtors }
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:STYle?
Argument 1: DOTs displays individual data points.
Argument 2: VECtors connects adjacent data points. Old points are immediately replaced by new
ones.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU STYLE?
might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data points.
195
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence is set to VARpersist. This affects the display only.
Group: Display
Related Command:
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence
Syntax 1: DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist <NR3>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the time, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on the
screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.
Example: DISPLAY:INSTAVU VARPERSIST 3
specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for 3 seconds before they
disappear.
196
DISplay:INTENSITy?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the current intensity settings for different parts of the display.
Group: Display
Syntax: DISplay:INTENSITy?
Example: DISPLAY:INTENSITY?
might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60
or :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 175
197
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 6X0B Only)
Description: Sets the intensity of the intensified zone on a waveform. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Contrast in the Display Intensity side menu.
The command has no effect on limit test templates or intensified samples. They are displayed at a
fixed contrast ratio.
Group: Display
Related Command: HORizontal:MODe
Syntax 1: DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast <NR1>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast?
Argument 1: <NR1> ranges from 100 to 250 percent.
Example: DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST 140
sets the intensity of the intensified portion of a waveform.
198
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERALL
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 6X0B Only)
Description: Sets the intensity of the entire display. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting Overall in the Display Intensity side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERALL <NR1>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERALL?
Argument: <NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.
Example 1: DISplay:INTENSITY:OVERALL 50
sets the intensity of the display to the middle of the range.
Example 2: DISplay:INTENSITY:OVERALL?
might return 75 as the overall display intensity.
199
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt
Description: Sets the intensity of the text and the graticule. Sending this command is equivalent
to setting Text/Grat in the Display Intensity side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt <NR1>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt?
Argument: <NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.
Example: DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT 100
sets the intensity of the text to the brightest level.
200
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Description: Sets the intensity of the waveforms. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Waveform in the Display Intensity side menu.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1>
Syntax 2: DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?
Argument: <NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.
Example: DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM?
might return 60 as the intensity of the waveform.
201
DISplay:MODe
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects whether or not to turn on DPO mode.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:MODe { INStavu | NORMal }
Syntax 2: DISplay:MODe?
Argument 1: INSTavu turns on DPO mode. This mode can help you view infrequent deviations in
a signal. It only uses a 500 point record length, no averaging, and no enveloping.
When you turn on DPO mode, the oscilloscope turns off any active zoom, autosave, limit test,
waveform math, FastFrame, and XY display. The oscilloscope reactivates these features when
you turn off DPO mode.
Argument 2: NORMal turns on the normal (non-DPO) mode.
Example 1: DISPLAY:MODE INSTAVU
turns on InstaVu.
Example 2: DISPLAY:MODE?
might return INSTAVU indicating that the DPO mode is on.
202
DISplay:PERSistence
Description: Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when DISplay:STYle is set to
VARpersist. This affects the display only and is equivalent to setting Variable Persistence in the
Display Style side menu.
Group: Display
Related Command: DISplay:STYle
Syntax 1: DISplay:PERSistence <NR3>
Syntax 2: DISplay:PERSistence?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on the
screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.
Example: DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 3
specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for 3 seconds before they fade.
203
DISplay:STYle
Description: Selects how the data is displayed. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Style in the Display menu.
Group: Display
Related Command: DISplay:PERSistence
Syntax 1: DISplay:STYle { DOTs | INFPersist | INTENSIFied | VARpersist | VECtors }
Syntax 2: DISplay:STYle?
Argument 1: DOTs displays individual data points.
Argument 2: INFPersist accumulates data points on the display indefinitely. The display is reset
when the style or acquisition is reset.
Argument 3: VARpersist leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time specified
by DISplay:PERSistence.
Argument 4: VECtors connects adjacent data points. Old points are immediately replaced by new
ones.
Argument 5: INTENSIFied causes the display to show acquired (non-interpolated) samples with
brighter or different colored dots than the rest of the waveform.
Example 1: DISPLAY:STYLE INFPERSIST
sets the display to indefinitely accumulate data points on the screen.
Example 2: DISPLAY:STYLE?
might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data points.
204
DISplay:TRIGBar
Description: Controls the display of the trigger bar indicator/s. The bar indicates where the trigger
will occur, in voltage.
The oscilloscope will only display the bar if the trigger source is also displayed. If both a main and
a delayed trigger are displayed, then two bars will appear. One will accompany each source. If a
logic trigger is selected, then multiple bars may appear. If a runt pulse trigger is selected, then two
bars may appear. One will show the upper threshold and one the lower threshold.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:TRIGBar { OFF | SHORT | LONG }
Syntax 2: DISplay:TRIGBar?
Argument 1: OFF removes the trigger bar indicator from the display.
Argument 2: SHORT displays a short arrow at the right side of the graticule for each displayed
trigger signal.
Argument 3: LONG displays a horizontal line in the center of the graticule for each displayed
trigger signal.
Example: DISPLAY:TRIGBAR LONG
sets the display to show long trigger bar indicator (or indicators).
205
DISplay:TRIGT
Description: Controls the display of the trigger indicator. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting the Display `T' @ Trigger Point in the Readout Options side menu. The query form
returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).
Group: Display
Syntax 1: DISplay:TRIGT { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: DISplay:TRIGT?
Argument 1: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the trigger indicator from the display.
Argument 2: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 displays a trigger indicator on each of the displayed
waveforms. The trigger indicator is in reverse video for the selected waveform.
Example 1: DISPLAY:TRIGT ON
sets the display to show trigger indicators.
Example 2: DISPLAY:TRIGT?
might return 1 indicating that the display shows trigger indicators.
206
*ESE
Description: Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER
prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a more detailed
discussion of the use of these registers, see the section on Registers.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: *CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?,
EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1: *ESE <NR1>
Syntax 2: *ESE?
Argument: <NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the ESER are
set according to this value.
The power-on default for ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER maintains its value
through a power cycle.
NOTE: Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be
entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register.
Use the DESE command to set the DESER. A discussion of event handling begins on page .
Example 1: *ESE 209
sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and OPC bits.
Example 2: *ESE?
might return the string *ESE 186, showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010.
207
*ESR?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also
clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it). For a more detailed discussion of the use of
these registers, see the section on Registers.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax: *ESR?
Example: *ESR?
might return the value 213, showing that the SESR contains binary 11010101.
208
EVENT?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the
results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from the Event Queue.
For more information, see the section on Event Handling.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands:
ALLev?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax: EVENT?
Example: EVENT?
might return the response :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a command header.
209
EVMsg?
(Query Only)
Description: Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results of
the last *ESR? read, and returns the event code along with an explanatory message. For more
information, see the section on Event Handling.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands:
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB
Syntax: EVMsg?
Returns: The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event Code><Comma><QString>...]
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command
error is detected by the oscilloscope. As much of the command will be returned as possible
without exceeding the 60 character limit of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined.
The command string is right-justified.
Example: EVMSG?
might return the message :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".
210
EVQty?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This is useful when
using the ALLEv? query since it lets you know exactly how many events will be returned.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
Syntax: EVQty?
Example: EVQTY?
might return 3 as the number of event codes in the Event Queue.
211
FACtory
(No Query Form)
Description: Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Recall Factory Setup in the Waveform Save/Recall menu.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax: FACtory
Setting the oscilloscope to factory default includes:
•
Clears the Event Status Enable Register.
•
Clears the Service Request Enable Register.
•
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255.
•
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE
•
Purges all defined aliases.
•
Enables all Command Headers (HEADer ON).
•
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a "zero-length field."
•
o Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.
The FACtory command does not alter the following:
•
The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1-1987) interface.
•
The selected GPIB address.
•
Calibration data that affects device specifications.
•
Protected user data.
•
Stored settings.
•
The current password (if implemented).
212
FILESystem:COPy
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Copies a named file or files to a new file. The new file may be in a totally separate
directory than the old file. Also, you can use wild card characters (*.*) to copy multiple files with
one command.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:Copy { <source file path>,<destination file path> | <source directory
path>,<destination file path> | <source directory path>,<destination directory path> }
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will copy the file in the current directory. <filename> stands for a
filename of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3-character extension.
You can also use the inclusive filename *.* in the source file path to copy all files.
Argument 2: <directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the directory
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If
you do not specify them, the TDS will copy the directory in the current directory. <directory name>
stands for a directory name of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3character extension.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:COPY "TEK00001.SET","fd0:/TEK00001.SET"
copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the current drive to a file named TEK00001.SET on the
drive fd0: in the root directory.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:COPY "fd0:/YOURDIR/TEK00001.SET","fd0:/MYDIR"
copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the fd0: drive and the YOURDIR directory to the MYDIR
directory on the same drive.
Example 3: FILESYSTEM:COPY "YOURDIR","fd0:/MYDIR"
copies the files in the YOURDIR directory in the current directory to the MYDIR directory on the
fd0: drive.
213
FILESystem:CWD
(File System Only)
Description: Sets or returns the current working directory (CWD) path.
Group: File system
Syntax 1: FILESystem:CWD <directory path>
Syntax 2: FILESystem:CWD?
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:CWD "fd0:/MYDIR"
will define fd0:/MYDIR as the current directory.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:CWD?
might return fd0:/MYDIR if that is the current directory.
214
FILESystem:DELEte
(No Query Form) File System Only)
Description: Deletes a named file.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will delete the file in the current directory. <filename> stands for a
filename of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3-character extension.
You can also use the inclusive filename *.* to delete all files.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:DELETE "NOT-MINE.SET"
deletes the file named NOT-MINE.SET on the default drive and directory.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:DELETE "*.*"
deletes all the files in the default directory on the default drive.
215
FILESystem:DELWarn
(File System Only)
Description: Turns on or off the front-panel file-delete warning. No warning is returned via the
GPIB.
Group: File system
Syntax 1: FILESystem:DELWarn { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: FILESystem:DELWarn?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on the front-panel delete warning.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the front-panel delete warning.
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:DELWARN OFF
disables the front-panel delete warning.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:DELWARN?
might return 0 indicating the front-panel warning is disabled.
216
FILESystem:DIR
(Query Only) (File System Only)
Description: Returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the name of a file or directory
in the current directory.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:DIR?
Example: FILESYSTEM:DIR?
returns a list of files and directories in the default directory.
217
FILESystem:FORMat
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Formats a named drive.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:FORMat <drive name>
Argument: <drive name> is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format. fd0: refers to the
floppy-disk drive built into the oscilloscope.
Example: FILESYSTEM:FORMAT "fd0:"
formats the media on drive fd0:.
218
FILESystem:FREESpace
(Query Only) (File System Only)
Description: Returns the amount of freespace (in bytes) on the current drive.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:FREESpace?
Example: FILESYSTEM:FREESpace?
might return 0 as the amount of freespace available if the drive was full.
219
FILESystem:MKDir
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Make a new directory.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>
Argument: <directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the directory using
the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will create the directory in the current directory. <directory name>
stands for a directory name of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3char extension.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example: FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "NEATPICS"
creates the directory named NEATPICS on the current drive.
220
FILESystem:OVERWrite
(File System Only)
Description: Turns on or off the file overwrite protection. Turning on file-overwrite protection
prevents writing over existing files.
Group: File system
Syntax 1: FILESystem:OVERWrite { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: FILESystem:OVERWrite?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on the file-overwrite protection.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the file-overwrite protection.
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE OFF
lets you overwrite existing files.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE?
might return 0 indicating you cannot overwrite existing files.
221
FILESystem:PRInt
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Prints a named file to the named port.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:PRInt <filepath>,{ GPIb | RS232 | CENtronics }
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will print the file in the current directory. <filename> stands for a
filename of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3-char extension.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Argument 2: GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.
Argument 3: CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the
Centronics port (Option 13 RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).
Argument 4: RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (RS232/Centronics
Hardcopy Interface only).
Example: FILESYSTEM:PRINT "TEK00000.IBM",CENTRONICS
sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out the Centronics port.
222
FILESystem:READFile
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Copies a named file to the GPIB port.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:READFile <file path>
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to read. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify
them, the TDS will look for the filename in the current directory.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example: FILESYSTEM:READFILE "hd0:TEK00000.IBM"
sends a hard-disk-based file named TEK00000.IBM out the GPIB port.
223
FILESystem:REName
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Assigns a new name to a file.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path>
Argument 1: <old file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to rename. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will look for the filename in the current directory.
Argument 2: <new file path> is a quoted string that defines the new name of the file. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you
do not specify them, the TDS will place the newly named file in the current directory.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example: FILESYSTEM:RENAME "TEK00000.SET","MYSETTING.SET"
gives the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file remains on the
current directory.
224
FILESystem:RMDir
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Deletes a named directory.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>
Argument: <directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the directory using
the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will delete the directory in the current directory. <directory name>
stands for a directory name of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (".") and a 3char extension.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example: FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "NEATPICS"
deletes the directory named NEATPICS in the current directory.
225
FILESystem:WRITEFile
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Copies the GPIB port block data to a named file.
Group: File system
Syntax: FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>,<Block>
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to read. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify
them, the TDS will look for the filename in the current directory.
<Block> is a block of data bytes that uses the form shown below:
==============================================
Symbol
Meaning
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character, in the range 1-9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range 0-9
<Dchar>
A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through
FF hexadecimal (0 through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes, defined as:
<Block> ::=
( #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]
| #0[<Dchar>...]<terminator> )
==============================================
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the <Dig> elements
form a decimal integer that specifies how many <Dchar> elements follow.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example 1: FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE "hd0:/hello1.txt”,#21hello world"
writes the text string “hello world” to a file named HELLO1.TXT on the oscilloscope’s hard disk. It
uses a format that defines the number of characters to transfer.
Example 2: FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE "hd0:/HELLO2.TXT”,#0hello world
writes the text string “hello world” to a file named HELLO2.TXT on the oscilloscope’s hard disk. It
uses a format that does not define the number of characters to transfer.
226
HARDCopy
Description: Sends a copy of the screen display followed by and EOI to the port specified by
HARDCopy:PORT. The format and layout of the output is specified with the HARDCopy:FORMat
and HARDCopy:LAYout commands. Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the frontpanel HARDCOPY button.
The HARDCopy? query returns format, layout, and port information.
NOTE: This command is NOT IEEE Std 488.2-1987 compatible.
Group: Hardcopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy { ABOrt | CLEARSpool | STARt }
Syntax 2: HARDCopy?
Argument 1: ABOrt terminates the hardcopy output in process.
NOTE: DCL does NOT clear the output queue once a hardcopy is in process. The only way to
abort the hardcopy process is to send the HARDCopy ABOrt command. The output queue can
then be cleared using DCL.
Argument 2: CLEARSpool clears the printer output spooler.
Argument 3: STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the controller where it can be stored in
a file or redirected to a printing device.
NOTE: Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure that the first
hardcopy is complete before starting another.
Example: HARDCOPY ABORT
stops any hardcopy output that is in process.
227
HARDCopy:FILEName
(File System Only)
Description: Selects the file to send the hardcopy data to on the next hardcopy command
(HARDCOPY START). Sending this command is equivalent to setting the target file name in the
Hardcopy menu.
Group: Hardcopy
Related Command: HARDCopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy:FILEName <file path>
Syntax 2: HARDCopy:FILEName?
Argument: <file path> specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the named file. <file path> is a quoted
string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them,
the TDS will write the file to the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8
characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
You can automatically create different names for files. You do this by using the question mark (?)
as a special wildcard character. These stand for numbers the TDS will insert sequentially in the
filename. For example, if you placed two question marks at the end of the filename then
the oscilloscope would append 00 to the first file created, 01 to the next, and 02 to the next. This
helps you automatically create different names for files. It is particularly useful in automated
testing situations.
Example 1: HARDCOPY:FILENAME "TEK.IBM"
selects TEK.IBM as the selected file name.
Example 2: HARDCOPY:FILENAME?
might return TEK.IBM as the selected file name.
Example 3: HARDCOPY:FILENAME "TEK??.IBM"
selects TEK as the selected file name with a numeric, two-digit suffix. The TDS might return
TEK00.IBM as the first file, TEK01.IBM as the second.
228
HARDCopy:FORMat
Description: Selects the output data format for hardcopies. Sending this command is equivalent
to setting Format in the Hardcopy menu.
Group: Hardcopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BMPCOLOR | DESKJET | DESKJETC (not on TDS 400A
& 510A) | DPU411 | DPU412 | EPSCOLImg (not on TDS 400A & 510A) | DESKJETC (not on TDS
400A & 510A) | EPSColor | EPSImage | EPSMono | EPSOn | HPGl | INTERLeaf | LASERJet |
PCX | PCXCOLOR | RLE (not on TDS 400A & 510A) | THInkjet | TIFf }
Syntax 2: HARDCopy:FORMat?
On monochrome instruments, the following formats are mapped to a monochrome near
equivalent:
PCXCOLOR
-> PCX
BMPCOLOR
-> BMP
RLE
-> BMP
EPSCOLIMG -> EPSIMAGE
DESKJETC
-> DESKJET
(The DESKJETC argument is not the TDS 400A and 510A)
For example: if HARDCOPY:FORMAT PCXCOLOR and HARDCOPY:FORMAT? are sent to the
oscilloscope, PCX is returned.
Example 1: HARDCOPY:FORMAT HPGL
sets the hardcopy output format to HPGL.
Example 2: HARDCOPY:FORMAT?
might return INTERLEAF as the final hardcopy output format.
229
HARDCopy:LAYout
Description: Selects the printing orientation. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Layout in the Hardcopy menu.
Group: Hardcopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy:LAYout { LANdscape | PORTRait }
Syntax 2: HARDCopy:LAYout?
Argument 1: LANDscape specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the longest side of
the page.
Argument 2: PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the short side of the
page. This is the standard format.
Example: HARDCOPY:LAYOUT?
might return PORTRAIT as the hardcopy page-layout format.
230
HARDCopy:PALEtte
(TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D)
Description: Selects whether to create the hardcopy using the current color palette (as set in the
Display menu and seen on the screen) or the hardcopy palette. For color hardcopies, the default
hardcopy palette may be most appropriate since it has a white background and requires less ink
for printing onto white paper. For monochrome hardcopies, the TDS ignores the palette and prints
black (or the default color) objects on a blank background.
Group: Hardcopy
Related Command: HARDCopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy:PALEtte { CURRent | HARDCopy }
Syntax 2: HARDCopy:PALEtte
Example: HARDCOPY:PALETTE HARDCOPY
would print each copy made using the hardcopy palette.
231
HARDCopy:PORT
Description: Selects where to send the hardcopy data on the next hardcopy command (i.e.
HARDCOPY START command). Sending this command is equivalent to setting Port in the
Hardcopy menu.
Group: Hardcopy
Related Command: HARDCopy, LIMit:HARDCopy
Syntax 1: HARDCopy:PORT { CENtronics| FILE (Option 1F File System only) | GPIb | RS232 }
Syntax 2: HARDCopy:PORT?
Argument 1: CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the Centronics port (available
with the RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface).
Argument 2: FILE specifies that the hardcopy is stored in the file named in the
HARDCOPY:FILENAME command.
Argument 3: GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.
Argument 4: RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (Option 13
RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).
Example: HARDCOPY:PORT?
might return GPIB as the selected hardcopy output port.
232
HDR
Description: This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for compatibility with
older Tektronix instruments.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax 1: HDR { <NR1> | OFF | ON }
Syntax 2: HDR?
233
HEADer
Description: Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope
to either include or omit headers on query responses. This command does not affect IEEE Std
488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk); they never return headers.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Command: VERBose
Syntax 1: HEADer { <NR1> | OFF | ON }
Syntax 2: HEADer?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This
causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the
query response as a command.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes
the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
Example 1: HEADER OFF
causes the oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses.
Example 2: HEADER?
might return the value 1, showing that the Response Header Enable State is true.
234
HIStogram?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns histogram parameters. In other words, it queries the state of all settable
histogram parameters.
Group: Histogram
Syntax: HIStogram?
Example: HISTOGRAM?
might return
:HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1;MODE VERTICAL;DISPLAY LOG;BOXPCNT
30.0E+0,25.1E+0,70.0E+0,75.2E+0;SIZE 1.00E+0
235
HIStogram:BOX
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Defines the left, top, right, and bottom positions of the histogram box, in source
waveform coordinates. Any value outside the display is clipped to the display boundary and
generates an error.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:BOX <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>
Syntax 2: HIStogram:BOX?
Argument 1: <NR3> is the left position of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates.
Argument 2: <NR3> is the top position of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the right position of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates.
Argument 4: <NR3> is the bottom position of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates.
Example: HISTOGRAM:BOX 1e-9, 0.250, 2e-9, 0.500
would define the coordinates of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates
236
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Defines the left, top, right, and bottom positions of the histogram box, in percentage
coordinates. The upper left has the value 0, 0 and the lower right has the value 100, 100 when the
horizontal trigger position is 50%. Any value outside the range of 0 to 100 is clipped and generates
an error.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:BOXPcnt <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>
Syntax 2: HIStogram:BOXPcnt?
Argument 1: <NR3> is the left position of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. 30 is the
default value.
Argument 2: <NR3> is the top position of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. 75 is the
default value.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the right position of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. 70 is
the default value.
Argument 4: <NR3> is the bottom position of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates 25 is
the default value.
Example: HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 50.2, 75.6, 50.8, 30.4
would define the coordinates of a histogram box in percentage coordinates
237
HIStogram:COUNt
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Zeros the counts for histograms. If histograms are on then the counts start counting
up again.
Group: Histogram
Syntax: HIStogram:COUNt RESET
Argument: RESET indicates the need to zero the count.
Example: HISTOGRAM:COUNT RESET
would zero the count.
238
HIStogram:DISplay
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the way the histogram is displayed, if at all.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:DISplay { LINEAr | LOG | OFF }
Syntax 2: HIStogram:DISplay?
Argument 1: LINEAr to display the count in each bin. This is the default value.
Argument 2: LOG to display the log of the count in each bin. Log scaling provides better visual
detail for bins with low counts.
Argument 3: OFF to turn off histogram displays. Histogram counting and measurements can
continue. The histogram box is not turned off.
Example: HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LINEAR
would display the count in each bin.
239
HIStogram:MODe
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects the type of histogram to create or turns the histogram off.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:MODe { OFF | HORizontal | VERTical }
Syntax 2: HIStogram:MODe?
Argument 1: OFF means turn off. This is the default value.
Argument 2: HORizontal means select a horizontally positioned histogram that shows time
distribution.
Sending this command with this argument will turn off the extended acquisition length and DPO
modes.
Argument 3: VERTical means select a vertically positioned histogram that shows voltage (or
amps, etc.) distribution.
Sending this command with this argument will turn off the extended acquisition length and DPO
modes.
Example: HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF
would turn off the histogram mode.
240
HIStogram:SIZe
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls the width or height of the histogram on the screen.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:SIZe <NR3>
Syntax 2: HIStogram:SIZe?
Argument: <NR3> varies from 0.1 to 10.0 in div units. It varies from 0.1 to 8.0 in HORIZONTAL
mode and from 0.1 to 10.0 in VERTICAL mode. Resolution is to the nearest pixel.
Example: HISTOGRAM:SIZE 2.0
would set the size of the histogram to 2.0 divs.
241
HIStogram:SOUrce
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects which trace will be compared against the histogram box, when histograms
are turned on. CH1-4 need not be ON for histograms to run. You might want the CH OFF so you
can see a full-screen histogram and not have waveform data confuse the display.
Group: Histogram
Syntax 1: HIStogram:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: HIStogram:SOUrce?
Argument: <x> indicates CH #. It may be 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Example: HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1
would enable CH1 to be compared against the histogram box.
242
HORizontal?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all settings for the horizontal commands. The commands
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, HORizontal:SCAle, and HORizontal:SECdiv
are equivalent so HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is the only value that is returned.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal?
Example: HORIZONTAL?
might return the string :HORIZONTAL:MODE MAIN;RECORDLENGTH 500; POSITION
5.0E+0;TRIGGER:POSITION 50;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 1.0E6;:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFTER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME: 16.0E-9
243
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the overall time interval covered by the live channels. This works for both
extended acquisition length mode on (acquisition length = # points) and off (record length =
acquisition length = # points).
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:ACQDURATION?
Returns: In seconds, # points * (time/point). The default is 5 ms.
244
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the acquisition length, either the extended one when the extended
acquisition length mode is on or the record length when this mode is off.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
Returns: The acquisition length. 500 is the default value.
Example: HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH?
might return: 500.
245
HORizontal:CLOck
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Enables either the internal or external clocks. The query returns whether the clock is
set to internal or external.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:CLOck { INTernal | EXTernal }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:CLOck?
Argument 1: INTernal enables the internal clock mode.
Argument 2: EXTernal enables the external clock mode.
Example: HORIZONTAL:CLOCK INTERNAL
enables the internal clocks.
246
HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Sets the maximum external clock rate. It does not enable the external clock. The
maximum external clock rate effects the decimation rate in Hi-Res mode.
If set to less than or equal to 1000, this command enables roll mode when external clock is on
and roll mode is set to auto.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate?
Argument: <NR3> is rounded up to the nearest allowable external clock rate.
Example: HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE 50
sets the maximum external clock rate to 50 clocks per second.
247
HORizontal:DELay?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all horizontal delayed time base parameters. The commands
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv and HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are identical so only
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle will be returned.
Group: Horizontal
Related Commands: HORizontal?,
HORizontal:DELay:MODe?, HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?,
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
Syntax: HORizontal:DELay?
Example: HORIZONTAL:DELAY?
might return the delay parameters
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFTER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME: 16.0E-9
248
HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Description: Selects the mode for the delayed time base. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting Time Base in the Horizontal menu.
Group: Horizontal
Related Command: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:MODe { RUNSAfter | TRIGAfter }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:MODe?
Argument 1: RUNSAfter specifies that the delayed time base runs a user-specified amount of
delay time after the main trigger event.
Argument 2: TRIGAfter specifies that the delayed time base is triggerable after the main time
base triggers.
Example: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE?
returns either RUNSAFTER or TRIGAFTER, indicating the delayed time base mode.
249
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
Description: Sets the time per division for the delayed time base. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Delayed Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.
On the TDS 400A, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not take effect until the
internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is enabled, the query form of this
command returns an <NR3> value representing '50'.
Group: Horizontal
Related Command: HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?
Argument: <NR3> is the time per division. For the TDS 784D, the range is 10 s to 200 ps. For the
other TDS 500D and 700D, the range is 10 s to 500 ps. For the TDS 600B, the range is 10 s to
200 ps. For the TDS 400A, the range is 20 s to 1 ns. This are values that are in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Values that are not in a 1-2-5 sequence (1-2.5-5 on the TDS 620B, 640B, & 644B) will be set to
the closest valid value. If the delayed time base scale is set slower than the main time base scale,
both the main and delayed time base scales will be set to the delay scale value.
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 2.0E-6
sets the delay scale to 2 us per division.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 9.0E-6
sets the delay scale to 10 us per division. Since 9 us is not a valid value within the 1-2-5 sequence
(1-2.5-5 on the TDS 620B, 640B, & 644B), it is automatically set to the closest valid value.
Example 3: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE?
might return 1.0E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms per division.
250
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
Description: This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:SCAle command. It is provided
to maintain program compatibility with some older
models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?
251
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Description: Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger
before the delayed time base begins. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
Delayed Runs After Main in the Time Base side menu of the Horizontal
menu.
Group: Horizontal
Related Commands: HORizontal:DELay:MODe,
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
Argument: <NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the
delayed trigger. The range on the TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D is from 16 ns to 250
seconds with a resolution of 4 ns. The range on the TDS 400A is from 10 ns
to 20 seconds with a resolution of 10 ns.
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 2.0E-3
sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?
might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:16.0E-9 for the delay time.
252
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter
Description: Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger before the delayed time
base begins. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Delayed Runs After Main in the
Time Base side menu of the Horizontal menu.
Group: Horizontal
Related Command: HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?
Argument: <NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the
delayed trigger. The range is from 16 ns (10 ns on the TDS 400A) to 250
seconds (20 s on the TDS 400A) with a resolution of 4 ns.
Example: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER 2.0E-3
sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.
253
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter
Description: Sets the delay time to wait in the trigger after delay mode.
This is the time that must pass before a delayed trigger is accepted.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting Delay by Time time in the Delayed
Trigger menu.
Group: Horizontal
Related Command: HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?
Argument: <NR3> is the delay time, in seconds. The range is from 16 ns
(60 ns on the TDS 400A to 250 seconds (20 s on the TDS 400A) with a
resolution of 4 ns 10 ns down to 110 ns on the TDS 400A).
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER 4.0E-6
sets the delay time to 4 us.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER?
might return 1.000E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms.
254
HORizontal:EXTDACQ
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Enable or disable extended-acquisition-length mode. The DPO display mode must
be off in order to turn the extended-acquisition-length mode on.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:EXTDACQ { <NR1> | OFF | ON }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:EXTDACQ?
Argument 1: indicates OFF if it’s a 0 or ON if it’s a 1 (or any other nonzero value).
Argument 2: ON means turn on.
Argument 3: OFF means turn off.
Returns: The query form only returns 0 or 1. The default is 0.
Example: HORIZONTAL:EXTDACQ ON
would enable extended-acquisition-length mode (if DPO mode was not on).
255
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries FastFrame frame count. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting FastFrame Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Count menu item in the side
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, captures a series of triggered
acquisitions with minimal intervening time.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNT <NR1>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNT?
Argument: <NR1> indicates the number of frames to acquire.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2
Sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two frames (segments) of data.
256
HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Turns FastFrame frame lock on or off.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock { ON | OFF | <NR1>}
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:FRAMELock?
Argument 1: <NR1> indicates OFF if it's a 0 or ON if it's a 1
(or any other non-zero value).
Argument 2: ON keeps the reference and position frames the same relative distance from each
other when either frame number is adjusted.
Argument 3: OFF allows the reference and position frames to be adjusted independently.
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:FRAMELOCK ON
turns on FastFrame Lock frames.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:FRAMELOCK?
might return 1 indicating that FastFrame Lock frames is on.
257
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Setup length of each FastFrame frame. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting FastFrame Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Length menu item in the side
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a series of triggered
acquisitions with minimal intervening time between them.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth { <NR1> }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth?
Argument: <NR1> indicates the frame (segment) length.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME: LENGTH 250
Sets up the FastFrame mode to acquire frames of 250 samples each.
258
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Display the selected FastFrame frame. Sending this command is equivalent to
selecting Horiz Pos in the Horizontal menu, selecting the Frame menu item in the side menu, and
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob. FastFrame, also known as memory
segmentation, lets users capture a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time
between them.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition <NR1>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition?
Argument: <NR1> indicates the selected frame to display.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION 25
Selects the 25th FastFrame frame to display.
259
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets the reference frame number. The reference frame is the starting frame in
calculating the delta timestamp. Sending this command is equivalent to setting Fast Frame in the
Horizontal menu and the Reference Frame menu item in the side menu.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:REF <NR1>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:REF?
Argument 1: <NR1> is the reference frame number. If the argument is less than 1 or greater than
the frame count, the value is clipped, but no error is generated.
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF 1
sets the reference frame for FastFrame TimeStamp readouts to 1.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF?
might return 3 indicating that the reference frame for FastFrame TimeStamps is 3.
260
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Set up FastFrame acquisition. Sending this command is equivalent to setting
FastFrame Setup in the Horizontal menu and the FastFrame menu item in the
side menu.
FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, lets you
capture a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal time between
them. In FastFrame mode, the oscilloscope is ready to accept a
continuous burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends the
ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
When extended-acquisition-length mode or DPO mode is on, this command can still set and
return values. However, FastFrame acquisitions will not occur.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1>}
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?
Argument 1: <NR1> indicates OFF if it's a 0 or ON if it's a 1
(or any other non-zero value).
Argument 2: ON turns on FastFrame.
Argument 3: OFF turns off FastFrame.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON
turns on FastFrame.
261
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (No LRN)
Description: Returns the relative time between the triggers of two specified frames. If FastFrame
is not on or either time stamp is not available, a parameter error is generated.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen? <NR1>, <NR1>
Returns: The relative time between the triggers of two specified frames.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN? 1,5
might return: “45:23:11.987 654 321 042”.
262
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:CLEARSNapshot
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (No Query Form) (No LRN)
Description: Clears the TimeStamp Snapshot display list and overlay menu if they are displayed.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:CLEARSNapshot
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:CLEARSNAPSHOT
clears the TimeStamp Snapshot if displayed.
263
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (No LRN)
Description: Returns the relative time between the triggers of the reference and position frames.
If FastFrame is not on or if either time stamp is not available, a parameter error is generated.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa?
Returns: The relative time between the triggers of the reference and position frames.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA?
might return: “45:23:11.987 654 321 042”.
264
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAme?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (No LRN)
Description: Returns the absolute trigger date and time for the requested frame (in text format). If
FastFrame is not on, or if the time stamp is not available, a parameter error is generated.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAme? <NR1>
Argument 1: <NR1> is the frame number for which the timestamp will be returned.
Returns: The absolute trigger date and time for the requested frame (in text format).
The displayed time uses the following format:
@Pos: xxx
DD MMM YYYY
HH:MM:SS.mmm,
uuu,nnn,ppp
Position (or reference) frame number
Date (day, month, and year)
Clock time (hours, minutes, seconds,
and milliseconds)
Fraction of a second (to picoseconds)
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME? 3
might return: “4 Apr 1998;08:47:24.123 456 789 112”.
265
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:POSition?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (No LRN)
Description: Returns the absolute trigger date and time for the position frame (in text format). If
FastFrame is not on or either time stamp is not available, a parameter error is generated.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:POSition?
Returns: The absolute trigger date and time for the position frame.
The displayed time uses the following format:
@Pos: xxx
DD MMM YYYY
HH:MM:SS.mmm,
uuu,nnn,ppp
Position (or reference) frame number
Date (day, month, and year)
Clock time (hours, minutes, seconds,
and milliseconds)
Fraction of a second (to picoseconds)
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:POSITION?
might return: “4 Apr 1998;08:47:24.123 456 789 112”.
266
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (No LRN)
Description: Returns the absolute trigger date and time for the reference frame (in text format). If
FastFrame is not on or if the time stamp is not available, a parameter error is generated.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
Returns: The absolute trigger date and time for the reference frame.
The displayed time uses the following format:
@Pos: xxx
DD MMM YYYY
HH:MM:SS.mmm,
uuu,nnn,ppp
Position (or reference) frame number
Date (day, month, and year)
Clock time (hours, minutes, seconds,
and milliseconds)
Fraction of a second (to picoseconds)
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REF?
might return: “4 Apr 1998;08:47:24.123 456 789 112”.
267
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SNAPShot
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (No Query) (No LRN)
Description: Displays the TimeStamp Snapshot display list and overlay menu on the oscilloscope
display. If a Snapshot is already displayed, this command behaves like the Again button of
FastFrame TimeStamp Snapshot.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp: SNAPShot
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SNAPSHOT
displays the TimeStamp Snapshot.
268
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:STATE
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Turns the TimeStamp mode on or off. FastFrame mode being off does not preclude
TimeStamp mode from being on. However, if FastFrame mode is off, turning on TimeStamp
mode has no effect until FastFrame is turned on.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1>}
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:STATE?
Argument 1: <NR1> indicates OFF if it's a 0 or ON if it's a 1
(or any other non-zero value).
Argument 2: ON turns on FastFrame TimeStamps.
Argument 3: OFF turns off FastFrame TimeStamps.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:STATE ON
turns on FastFrame TimeStamps.
269
HORizontal:FITtoscreen
Description: Set-up horizontal-waveform compression. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu and the Fit to screen menu item in the side menu.
Waveform compress lets you fit a captured waveform to the visible screen. It provides the same
functionality as if you were in zoom mode and changed the time per division until the waveform fit
the screen.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, entering the zoom preview state causes fit-to-screen to be
on. If the oscilloscope exits the extended-acquisition-length mode or zoom preview state, the fitto-screen mode returns back to its prior setting.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:FITtoscreen { ON | OFF | <NR1>}
Syntax 2: HORizontal:FITtoscreen?
Argument 1: <NR1> indicates OFF if it's a 0. It indicates ON if it's a
non-zero value.
Argument 2: ON turns on waveform compress.
Argument 3: OFF turns off waveform compress.
Example: HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN ON
turns on waveform compress.
270
HORizontal:MAIn?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the time per division of the main time base. The commands
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv and HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle are identical so only
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle will be returned.
Group: Horizontal
Related Commands:
HORizontal:SCAle, HORizontal:SECdiv, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Syntax: HORizontal:MAIn?
Example: HORIZONTAL:MAIN?
might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 1.0E-6.
271
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Description: Sets the time per division for the main time base. Sending this command is
equivalent to setting Main Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.
On the TDS 400A, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not take effect until the
internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is enabled, the query form of this
command returns an <NR3> value representing '50'.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, no matter what value you set, the oscilloscope will only use
the closest real-time, non-interpolated value.
Group: Horizontal
Related Commands:
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Syntax 1: HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
Argument: <NR3> is the time per division. For the TDS 400A series, the range is 20 s to 1 ns.
For the TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, and 700D, the range is 10 s to 500 ps (or 200 ps on the TDS
784D), in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Example: HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2E-6
sets the main scale to 2 us per division.
272
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Description: Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is identical to the
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is provided to maintain program compatibility with some
older models of Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group: Horizontal
Related Commands:
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Syntax 1: HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv?
273
HORizontal:MODe
Description: Selects whether the horizontal display uses the main or delayed time base or both.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting Time Base in the Horizontal menu.
Group: Horizontal
Related Command:
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast
Syntax 1: HORizontal:MODe { DELAYEd | INTENSIFied | MAIn }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:MODe?
Argument 1: DELAYEd means that the selected waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the
delayed time base.
Argument 2: INTENSIFied uses both the main and delay scales to display the waveform. The
portion of the waveform that would be displayed in DELAYEd mode is intensified. The level of
intensity is set by the DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast command.
Argument 3: MAIn means that the waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the main time base.
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:MODE DELAYED
uses the delayed horizontal scale to display the waveform.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:MODE?
might return INTENSIFIED, indicating that the waveform is displayed using both the main and
delayed time base scale.
274
HORizontal:POSition
Description: Positions the waveform horizontally on the display. This is used for both main and
delayed time bases. Sending this command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel Horizontal
Position knob or setting the position in the Horizontal Position side menu.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:POSition?
Argument: <NR3> is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform that is displayed left of the
center graticule.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it is the percent of the acquisition that is displayed left of the
center graticule.
Example: HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10
sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that 10% of the waveform is to the left of screen
center.
275
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Description: Sets the number of data points that are acquired for each record. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and return values.
However, this feature will not actually work while extended-acquisition-length mode is on.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Argument: <NR1> Table 2-30 below shows supported values for <NR1>.
Table 2-30:Record Length Values (<NR1>)
Configuration
Standard
Option 1M
(not on the
TDS 510A)
or 2M
(TDS 500D &
700D only)
TDS 420A
TDS 430A
TDS 460A
500,
1000,
2500,
5000,
15000,
30000
60000,
120000
TDS 510A
TDS 520D
TDS 724D
500,
1000,
2500,
5000,
15000,
50000
TDS 520D
& 724D:
75000,
100000,
130000,
250000
TDS 600B
500,
1000,
2500,
5000,
15000
TDS 540D
TDS 580D
TDS 754D
TDS 784D
TDS 794D
500,
1000,
2500,
5000,
15000,
50000
75000,
100000,
130000,
250000,
500000
Example 1: HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 2500
specifies that 2500 data points will be acquired for each record.
Example 2: HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH?
might return 15000 as the number of data points per record.
276
HORizontal:RECORDSTART
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Set the selected live channel’s record start that is to be used in the extendedacquisition-length mode. In other words, it indicates where the waveform starts within the
extended acquisition record.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:RECORDSTART <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:RECORDSTART?
Argument: <NR3> is the units of percent. It ranges from 0% to 93.75% (for 4M and 8M) or 95%
(for 2M).
If fit-to-screen is on or extreme zoom factors are on, then the recordstart is automatically set to 0.
Returns: The query form returns a value from 0 to 93.75 (%) for 4M and 8M or 95 (%) for 2M.
This is the figure for a specific sample.
Example: HORIZONTAL:RECORDSTART 23
would set the record to start at 23%.
277
HORizontal:ROLL
(TDS 400A Only)
Description: Sets roll mode to auto (on) or off.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:ROLL { OFF | ON | AUTO | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: HORizontal:ROLL?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off roll mode.
Argument 2: ON or AUTO or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on roll mode if the time/division is set
appropriately.
278
HORizontal:SCAle
Description: Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:SCAle?
279
HORizontal:SECdiv
Description: Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:SECdiv <NR3>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:SECdiv?
280
HORizontal:TRIGger?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the horizontal trigger parameter.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax: HORizontal:TRIGger?
Example: HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?
might return :HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50.
281
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Description: Sets or queries the position of the trigger. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting Trigger Position in the Horizontal menu.
Group: Horizontal
Syntax 1: HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition <NR1>
Syntax 2: HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
Argument: <NR1> is from 0 to 100 %.
Example: HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION?
might return 50.
282
ID?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware.
Group: Status and Error
Related Command: *IDN?
Syntax: ID?
Returns: The instrument id in the following format:
TEK/<model number>,CF:92.1CT,FV:<firmware version number>
Example: ID?
might return TEK/TDS544A,CF:92.1CT,FV:3.0
283
*IDN?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the oscilloscope identification code.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Command: ID?
Syntax: *IDN?
Returns: The instrument id in the following format:
TEKTRONIX,<model number>,0,CF:92.1CT FV:<firmware version number>
Example: *IDN?
might return the response TEKTRONIX,TDS544A,0,CF:92.1CT FV:2.0
284
LIMit:BELl
Description: Rings the bell when the waveform data exceeds the limits set in the limit test, if the
limit state is on.
Group: Limit Test
Related Command: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE
Syntax 1: LIMit:BELl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:BELl?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off ringing the bell when any waveform data exceeds the
limits set by the limit test.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on ringing the bell.
Example 1: LIMit:BELl ON
specifies that the bell is to ring when any waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit
test.
Example 2: LIMit:BELl?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the bell is to ring when any waveform data exceeds the
limits specified in the limit test.
285
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
Description: Sets or queries the template against which to compare the waveform acquired
through the specified channel. The template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference
locations REF1 through REF4, or none.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands:
CURve, LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination,
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, WFMPre
Syntax 1: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x> { NONe | REF<x> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>?
Argument 1: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 2: NONe specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.
Example 1: LIMIT:COMPARE:CH1 REF1
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms acquired using
CH1.
Example 2: LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2?
might return LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired using CH2 will be
compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.
286
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the template against which to compare a math waveform. The
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1 through REF4, or
none.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands:
CURve, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, WFMPre
Syntax 1: LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x> { NONe | REF<x> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>?
Argument 1: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 2: NONe specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.
Argument 3: MATH<x> is a math waveform.
Example 1: LIMIT:COMPARE:CH1 REF1
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms acquired using
CH1.
Example 2: LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2?
might return LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired using CH2 will be
compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.
287
LIMit:HARDCopy
Description: Executes a hardcopy operation on the waveform when any waveform data exceeds
the limits set in the limit test, if the limit state is on. The hardcopy operation uses the port, and
prints in the format and layout, specified using the HARDCopy commands.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE, HARDCopy
Syntax 1: LIMit:HARDCopy { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:HARDCopy?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on the hardcopy operation for the waveform when any
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the hardcopy operation.
Example 1: LIMit:HARDCopy ON
specifies that the hardcopy operation occurs for the waveform when any waveform data exceeds
the limits specified in the limit test.
Example 2: LIMit:HARDCopy?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the hardcopy operation occurs for the waveform when any
waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.
288
LIMit:STATE
Description: Turns limit testing on or off, or queries whether limit testing is in effect.
When extended-acquisition-length mode or DPO mode is on, this command can still set and
return values. However, this feature will not actually function.
You cannot turn limit:state to on when extended-acquisition-length mode is already on.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands:
CURve, LIMit:BELl, LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>, LIMit:HARDCopy, LIMit:TEMPLate, WFMPre
Syntax 1: LIMit:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off limit testing.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on limit testing.
Example 1: LIMit:STATE ON
specifies that limit testing of waveforms is in effect.
Example 2: LIMit:STATE?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether limit testing of waveforms is in effect.
289
LIMit:TEMPLate
(No Query Form)
Description: Creates a template which you can use for limit testing. You can compare the
waveform acquired through the specified channel against this template. The template can be a
waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1 through REF4, or none.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands:
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Syntax: LIMit:TEMPLate STORe
Argument: STORe creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and
stores it in the destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing comparisons.
Example: LIMIT:TEMPLate STORe
creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and stores it in the
destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing comparisons.
290
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
Description: Sets or queries the destination reference waveform that the LIMit:TEMPLate
STORe command will use.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>,
LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Syntax 1: LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination REF<x>
Syntax 2: LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination?
Argument: REF<x> specifies the reference waveform destination in which the template waveform
is to be stored.
Example: LIMIT:TEMPLate:DESTination REF2
specifies that the template waveform referred to with the LIMit:TEMPLate STORe command is
stored as the REF2 waveform.
291
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Description: Sets or queries the channel, math waveform, or reference waveform that the
LIMit:TEMPLate STORe command will use.
Group: Limit Test
Related Commands: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
Syntax 1: LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> }
Syntax 2: LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce?
Argument 1: CH<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently being
acquired using the specified channel.
Argument 2: MATH<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored as
the specified math waveform.
Argument 3: REF<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored as
the specified reference waveform.
Example 1: LIMIT:TEMPLate:SOUrce CH2
specifies that the template waveform for limit tests is the waveform currently acquired using
channel 2.
Example 2: LIMIT:TEMPLate:SOUrce?
might return MATH3, specifying that the template waveform for limit tests is the waveform
currently stored as the MATH3 waveform.
292
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Description: Sets or queries the amount, in units of horizontal divisions, by which the source
waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination waveform.
Group: Limit Test
Related Command: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
Syntax 1: LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal <NR3>
Syntax 2: LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
Argument: <NR3> is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the current waveform is
allowed to deviate from the template waveform without being deemed to have exceeded the limits
set in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.
Example 1: LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 1.0
specifies that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the template waveform if it is
within +-1.0 horizontal division.
Example 2: LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the
template waveform if it is within +-1.0 horizontal division.
293
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Description: Sets or queries the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the source waveform is
varied vertically when creating the destination waveform.
Group: Limit Test
Related Command: LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
Syntax 1: LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>
Syntax 2: LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
Argument: <NR3> is the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the current waveform is allowed
to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set in the limit test. The range
is 0 to 5 divisions.
Example 1: LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical 1.0
specifies that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the template waveform if it is
within + or - 1.0 vertical division from the template waveform.
Example 2: LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the
template waveform if it is within + or - 1.0 vertical division.
294
LOCk
Description: Enables and disables all front panel buttons and knobs. There is no front-panel
equivalent.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: UNLock, Remote Enable Group, Local Lockout Group
Syntax 1: LOCk { ALL | NONe }
Syntax 2: LOCk?
Argument 1: ALL disables all front panel controls.
Argument 2: NONe enables all front-panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL
command.
NOTE: If the oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the LOCk NONe
command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI/IEEE Std. 488.1-1987 Standard
Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Example 1: LOCK ALL
locks the front panel controls.
Example 2: LOCK?
returns NONe when the front panel controls are enabled by this command.
295
*LRN?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns a string listing the oscilloscope settings, except for configuration information
for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in
when you made the *LRN? query.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: HEADer, SET?, VERBose
Syntax: *LRN?
NOTE: The *LRN? query always returns a string including command headers, regardless of the
setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned string is intended to be sent back
to the oscilloscope as a command string. The VERBose command can still be used normally to
specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated.
Example: *LRN?
a partial response might look like this:
:ACQUIRE:STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET 1;STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP;:DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ONCE;COUNT 1;:DIAG:STATE HALT;:HEADER
1;:VERBOSE 1;:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.00E6;POSITION2 9.00E-6;SELECT CURSOR1;
296
MASK?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the status of all settable mask parameters.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK?
Returns:
might return
:MASK:MASK1:POINTSP
11.400000000E+0,12.531328321E+0,8.820e+01,8.840e+01,0.0
E+0,1.120e+01,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK2:POINTSP
22.800000000E+0,50.125313283E+0,3.820e+01,6.617e+01,6.140e+01,6.6
17e+01,7.680e+01,5.013e+01,6.140e+-1,3.383e01,3.383e+0
1;:MASK:MASK3:POINTSP
11.400000000E+0,87.719298246E+0,8.820e+01,8.772e+01,8.840e+01,1.0
03e+02,1.120e+01,1.003e+02;:MSK:MASK4:POINTSP
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK5:POINTSP
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK6:POINTSP
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK7:POINTSP
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MSAK:MASK8:POINTSP
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:STAN
0C1;DIS 1;COUN:STATE 0;:MASK:FILT ENA;AUTOS:OFFSETA 1;MOD
MAN;:MASK:SOU CH1;TBP 0.0E+0
297
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether or not an autoset will automatically be done after a standard mask
is selected. If mask counting is being done against a math trace, the mask autoset will not run.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:AUTOSet:MODe { AUTO | MANual }
Syntax 2: MASK:AUTOSet:MODe?
Argument 1: AUTO makes autoset run automatically when a standard mask is selected from the
front panel. Autoset does not keep running. It runs once when a standard is selected.
Argument 2: MANual means that the mask autoset algorithm for a standard mask will be run only
if the user presses the autoset button or sends the AUTOSET START command. If a standard
mask is not currently selected, the mask autoset algorithm will not run and the normal autoset will
run when the user presses the autoset button. Manual is the default value.
Example: MASK:AUTOSET:MODE AUTO
makes autoset run automatically when a standard mask is selected from the front panel.
298
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether or not a standard mask autoset adjusts vertical offset so the
waveform matches the mask. Such adjustment can be needed if ground (0 V) in the oscilloscope
does not match ground for the input signal. For the following standards, offset will not be adjusted
if this feature is OFF: T1.102, DS-0, E1, E2, and E3. For all other standards, offset will be
adjusted regardless of how this feature is set.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 prevents a standard-mask autoset from adjusting vertical offset
for standard masks. This is the default value.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 allows a standard-mask autoset to adjust vertical offset for
standard masks.
Example: MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ ON
allows a standard-mask autoset to adjust vertical offset for standard masks.
299
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Selects a standard mask for autoset. You can modify a standard mask and still force
the oscilloscope to autoset to the mask.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard { OC1 | OC3 | OC12 | DS0Single | DS0Double |
DS0Contra | DS0Timing | DS1Rate | E1Symmetrical | E1Coax | E2 | E3 | DS3Rate | E4_0 | E4_1 |
E5 | STM1E_0 |STM1E_1 | DS1 | DS1A | DS1C | DS2 | DS3 | DS3Time | DS4NA |DS4NA_Max |
STS1Eye | STS1Pulse | STS3 | STS3_Max | FC133 | FC266 | FC531 | FC1063 | FC133E |
FC266E | FC531E | FC1063E | D2 | D1 | VIDEO360 | ENET1250 | ENET100UTP | ENET100STP |
ENET10IDTime | ENET10IDVolt | ENET10IDFull |ENET10LKTime | ENET10LKVolt |
ENET10LKFull | FDDI | NONe | USERMask }
Syntax 2: MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard?
Argument 1: OC1 selects the mask specified by the OC1/STM0 standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 2: OC3 selects the mask specified by the OC3/STM1 standard (155.52 Mb/s).
Argument 3: OC12 selects the mask specified by OC12/STM4 standard (622.08 Mb/s).
Argument 4: DS0Single selects the mask specified by the DS-0 Single Pulse standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 5: DS0Double selects the mask specified by the DS-0 Double Pulse standard (64
kb/s).
Argument 6: DS0Contra selects the mask specified by the DS-0 Data Pulse, Contradirectional
standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 7: DS0Timing selects the mask specified by the DS-0 Timing Pulse, Contradirectional
standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 8: DS1Rate selects the mask specified by the ITU G.703 standard (1.544 Mb/s).
Argument 9: DS3Rate selects the mask specified by the ITU G.703 standard (44.736 Mb/s).
Argument 10: E1Symmetrical selects the mask specified by the E1 Symmetrical Pair standard
(2.048 Mb/s).
Argument 11: E1Coax selects the mask specified by the E1 Coaxial Pair standard (2.048 Mb/s).
Argument 12: E2 selects the mask specified by the E2 standard (8.448 Mb/s).
Argument 13: E3 selects the mask specified by the E3 standard (34.368 Mb/s).
Argument 14: ITU44 selects the mask specified by the ITU G.703 standard (44.736 Mb/s).
Argument 15: E4_0 selects the mask specified by the E4 Binary 0 standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 16: E4_1 selects the mask specified by the E4 Binary 1 standard (139.26 Mb/s).
300
Argument 17: E5 selects the mask specified by the E5 CEPT standard (565 Mb/s).
Argument 18: STM1E_0 selects the mask specified by the G.703 Binary 0 standard (155.52
Mb/s). The SONET standard GR-253-CORE calls this mask STS-3. ANSI standard T1.102 has
STS-3 eye pattern standards.
Argument 19: STM1E_1 selects the mask specified by the G.703 Binary 1 standard (155.52
Mb/s). The SONET standard GR-253-CORE calls this mask STS-3. ANSI standard T1.102 has
STS-3 eye pattern standards.
Argument 20: DS1 selects the mask specified by the DS1 standard (1.544 Mb/s).
Argument 21: DS1A selects the mask specified by the DS1A standard (2.048 Mb/s).
Argument 22: DS1C selects the mask specified by the DS1C standard (3.152 Mb/s).
Argument 23: DS2 selects the mask specified by the DS2 standard (6.312 Mb/s).
Argument 24: DS3 selects the mask specified by the DS3 standard (44.736 Mb/s).
Argument 25: DS3Time selects the mask specified by the DS3 standard (44.736 Mb/s). Mask
removes 1% of the points from each end of the DS3 Full Mask to fit mask within 5 ns per division.
Argument 26: DS4NA selects the mask specified by the DS4NA eye standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 27: DS4NA_Max selects the mask specified by the DS4NA Maximum equipment
output eye standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 28: STS1Eye selects the mask specified by the STS-1 Eye standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 29: STS1Pulse selects the mask specified by the STS-1 Pulse standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 30: STS3 selects the mask specified by the STS-3 eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).
Argument 31: STS3_Max selects the mask specified by the STS-3 Maximum equipment output
eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).
Argument 32: FC133 selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Optical standard
(132.7 Mb/s).
Argument 33: FC266 selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Optical standard
(265.6 Mb/s).
Argument 34: FC531 selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Optical standard
(531.2 Mb/s).
Argument 35: FC1063 selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Optical standard
(1.0635 Gb/s).
Argument 36: FC133E selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Electrical standard
(132.7 Mb/s).
Argument 37: FC266E selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Electrical standard
(265.6 Mb/s).
301
Argument 38: FC531E selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Electrical standard
(531.2 Mb/s).
Argument 39: FC1063E selects the mask specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Electrical
standard (1.0635 Gb/s).
Argument 40: D2 selects the mask implied by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4fsc NTSC standard
(143.1818 Mb/s).
Argument 41: D1 selects the mask implied by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component serial
video standard (270 Mb/s).
Argument 42: VIDEO360 selects the mask implied by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component
serial video standard (360 Mb/s).
Argument 43: ENET1250 selects the mask implied by the IEEE Draft P802.3z/D3 standard (1.25
Gb/s).
Argument 44: ENET100UTP selects the mask implied by the ANSI X3.263-1995 for Information
Technology standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 45: ENET100STP selects the mask implied by the ANSI X3.263-1995 for Information
Technology standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 46: ENET10IDTime selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition
1996 - Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10
Mb/s). This mask displays the first 20% of the IDL Full Mask, so that you can see that part of the
signal in detail.
Argument 47: ENET10IDVolt selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996
- Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s).
This mask changes the Vertical scale to zoom in on the middle 20% of the signal while looking at
the Full mask on the time axis.
Argument 48: ENET10IDFull selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996
- Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s).
Argument 49: ENET10LKTime selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition
1996 - Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10
Mb/s). This mask displays the first 20% of the Link Test Full Mask, so that you can see that part of
the signal in detail.
Argument 50: ENET10LKVolt selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition
1996 - Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10
Mb/s). This mask changes the Vertical scale to zoom in on the middle 20% of the signal while
looking at the Full mask on the time axis.
Argument 51: ENET10LKFull selects the mask implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition
1996 - Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10
Mb/s).
Argument 52: FDDI selects the mask implied by the FDDI standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 53: NONe causes the normal autoset to occur.
302
Argument 54: USERMask is a no-op when received by the SET form of this command. It is
allowed because a SET? can return it.
Example: MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD OC3
selects the OC3 standard for autoset.
303
MASK:COUNt
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (No Query Form)
Description: Zeros the counts for the masks. If Count Masks is on, then counting starts again.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:COUNt RESET
Argument: RESET zeros the mask counts.
Example: MASK:COUNT RESET
clears the mask counts.
304
MASK:COUNt:STATE
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether or not mask counting is being done.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:COUNt:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:COUNt:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off mask counting. This is the default state. If the channel
to count against is not on, mask counting is not turned on and an error is generated. If DPO mode
is on, mask counting is not turned on and an error is generated.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 turns on mask counting.
Example: MASK:COUNT:STATE ON
turns on mask counting.
305
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (no LRN)
Description: Returns the sum of all the hits in all the defined masks. If masks overlap (no
standard masks overlap) and a hit occurs in the overlap region, the total hits will count that hit
multiple times. It returns the current value, which may be displayed if the correct mask menu is
up, of this number.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
Returns: <NR1>
Example: MASK:COUNT:TOTAL?
might return: MASK:COUNT:TOTAL 57
306
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (no LRN)
Description: Returns the number of waveforms that have contributed to mask counting. This can
be much smaller than the ACQUIRE:NUMACQ number since the acquire number just counts how
many triggers have been processed. The time per div may be fast enough that 100 or more
triggers are required to be processed to fill one waveform. Even then, it may not be completely
filled.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?
Returns: <NR1>
Example: MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS
might return: MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS 286568
307
MASK:DISplay
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether or not defined masks are displayed on the screen. This is useful
for temporarily turning off user-defined masks without deleting them.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:DISplay { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:DISplay?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 removes the masks from the display. Turning this off turns mask
counting off. Selecting Zoom Preview turns this off.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 displays the masks on the display. This is the default value.
Turning mask counting on turns this on. Selecting any standard mask turns this on.
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPCNT or MASK:MASK<x>:POINTS turns this on.
Example 1: MASK:DISPLAY ON
sets the display to show the defined masks.
Example 2: MASK:DISPLAY?
might return 1 indicating that the display shows masks.
308
MASK:FILTer
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether a digital filter will be run on the waveform data. The filter simulates
expensive optical hardware. Different hardware would be used for each of the optical standards.
The digital filter will run only if ENABLE is the mode and one of the optical eye-pattern standard
masks is selected, There are several other restrictions:
•
One of the seven optical standards must be selected in the
Measure/Masks/MaskType/Standard Mask menu. In other words, any one of the three
SONET SDH or any of the four fibre channel standards from the Fibre Chan menu must be
selected.
•
The time per division setting must be the correct value for the mask which has been selected.
•
The record length must be set equal to 500.
•
Only one channel can be on. Mask autoset may force channels off in order to allow the mask
to be turned on.
•
The oscilloscope bandwidth must be set to full.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:FILTer { ENAble | DISAble }
Syntax 2: MASK:FILTer?
Argument 1: ENAbled enables the digital filter. ENAbled is the default value.
Argument 2: DISAbled disables the digital filter.
Example: MASK:FILTER ENABLED
enables the digital filter.
309
MASK:INVert
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Controls whether the defined masks appear inverted on the display. Inverted masks
are useful for testing the opposite polarity of a pulse. Once on, the current mask and all following
masks are displayed inverted (if the inverted form exists) until the invert command is turned off.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:INVert { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:INVert?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off mask inversion. The default is OFF.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 turns on mask inversion.
Example: MASK:INVERT ON
turns on mask inversion.
310
MASK:MARgin:PERCent
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the mask-margin percentage.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:MARgin:PERCent <NR3>
Syntax 2: MASK:MARgin:PERCent?
Argument: <NR3> is -50.0 to +50.0. The default is 5. A positive margin percentage will cause the
signal space to become smaller and make the mask pass/fail test harder to pass. A percentage
that would cause a displayed mask to cross another mask or to go off the screen is not allowed,
instead the oscilloscope restores the last valid margin.
Example: MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT 25
sets the mask margin percent to 25.
311
MASK:MARgin:STATE
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Turns mask margins on or off.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:MARgin:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:MARgin:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off mask margins. The default is OFF. The currently
displayed margined mask is erased and the original mask is displayed.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 turns on mask margins. The status of the currently displayed
standard mask is changed to User.
Example: MASK:MARGIN:STATE ON
turns on mask margins.
312
MASK:MASK<x>
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: In the set form, it deletes all points in the specified mask.
In the query form, it returns the state of all settable parameters of the specified mask.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:MASK<x> DELEte
Syntax 2: MASK:MASK<x>?
Argument: DELEte deletes all points in the specified mask
Returns: (query form) the coordinates of the specified mask in percentage units.
Example 1: MASK:MASK3 DELETE
deletes the points in mask 3.
Example 2: MASK:MASK1?
might return:
MASK:MASK1:POINTSP
11.400000000E+0,12.531328321E+0,8.820e+01,1.253e+01,8.840e+01,0.0
E+0,1.120e+01,0.0E+0
313
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNt?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (no LRN)
Description: Returns the number of hits in the specified mask. This will be zero unless the
MASK:COUNT:STATE is ON (or was ON).
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:MASK<x>:COUNt?
Returns: <NR1> is the number of hits in the specified mask. The count is never larger than
2**32-1 (4.29496e9).
Example: MASK:MASK3:COUNT?
might return:
MASK:MASK3:COUNT 1478
314
MASK:MASK<x>:NR_Pt?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (no LRN)
Description: Returns the number of points in the specified mask. One use of this query is to see
how many pairs a MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPCNT command will return.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:MASK<x>:NR_Pt?
Returns: <NR1> is the number of points in the specified mask.
Example: MASK:MASK3:NR_PT?
might return:
MASK:MASK3:NR_PT 5
315
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTS
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (no LRN)
Description: Defines points in the specified mask, in user coordinates. Any currently existing
points in the mask are deleted.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:MASK<x>:POINTS <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>, <NR3> ]
Syntax 2: MASK:MASK<x>:POINTS?
Argument: <NR3> refers to the coordinates of one of the vertexes in the mask. Each pair of
<NR3> is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a mask vertex. The order of the pairs has no
effect on the mask created. If the vertical or horizontal scale or position is changed after this
command and then the query form of this command is issued, then the <NR3> returned from the
TDS oscilloscope will not be the same. The general rule for how the boundary of the mask is
generated from the input pairs is that an imaginary line connects the top-left point with the bottomright point. All points below this imaginary line are part of the bottom boundary curve. All other
points are part of the top boundary curve. If just one pair is input then they are ignored and the
mask is marked as undefined. The default is no points in the mask.
If any point is outside the display area, an error is generated and the point is clipped to the nearest
boundary. If more than 50 points are specified, an error is generated and the extra points are
ignored.
If the specified mask is undefined, 0,0 is returned.
Example: MASK:MASK7:POINTS -2.3e-9, 44e-3, -2.5e-9, 47e-3, 1.2e-9, 40e-3
defines the points in mask 7.
316
MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Defines points in the specified mask in percentage coordinates. The upper leftmost
point is 0,0 and the point in the lower right is 100,100. Any currently existing points in the mask
are deleted.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>, <NR3> ]
Syntax 2: MASK:MASK<x>:POINTSPcnt?
Argument: <NR3> refers to the coordinates of one of the vertices in the mask. Each pair of
<NR3> values is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a mask vertex. The order of the pairs
has no effect on the mask created. Resolution of the <NR3> value is to the nearest pixel. 500
pixels horizontally implies 0.2% resolution. 200 pixels vertically implies 0.5% resolution. The
general rule for how the boundary of the mask is generated from the input pairs is that an
imaginary line connects the top-left point with the bottom-right point. All points below this
imaginary line are part of the bottom boundary curve. All other points are part of the top boundary
curve. Points are connected left to right. If just one pair is input, then they are ignored and the
mask is marked as undefined. The default is no points in the mask.
If any point is outside of 0..100, an error is generated and the point is clipped to the nearest
boundary. If more than 50 points are specified, an error is generated and the extra points are
ignored.
Returns: <NR3> that define the mask coordinates. If the specified mask is undefined, 0,0 is
returned.
Example: MASK:MASK7:POINTSPCNT 20.4, 10.5,90, 10.5, 50, 80
defines the points in mask 7.
317
MASK:PASSFail:BELl
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Turns the bell on or off for mask test failed or mask test complete.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:PASSFail:BELl { OFF | FAIl | COMPLete }
Syntax 2: MASK:PASSFail:BELl?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the pass/fail bell. The default is OFF.
Argument 2: FAIl turns on the pass/fail bell for a failed mask test.
Argument 3: COMPLete turns on the pass/fail bell for a failed mask test and for a complete mask
test.
Example: MASK:PASSFAIL:BELL OFF
turns off the bell for mask testing.
318
MASK:PASSFail:STATE
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Turns conditional mask counting on or off. The Pass/Fail Test side menu button will
reflect either Passing or Failed based on the number of hits in the mask for the requested number
of waveforms. A failed test generates an error message.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:PASSFail:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MASK:PASSFail:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off mask counting. The default is OFF.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> not = 0 turns on mask counting.
Example: MASK:PASSFAIL:STATE ON
turns on mask counting.
319
MASK:PASSFail:STATUs?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only) (no LRN)
Description: Returns the result of the conditional mask test.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:PASSFail:STATUs?
Returns: PASSING, PASSED, or FAILED is the status of the mask test.
Example: MASK:PASSFAIL:STATUS?
might return: MASK:PASSFAIL:STATUS PASSING.
320
MASK:PASSFail:THReshold
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the minimum number of mask hits that is a test failure.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:PASSFail:THReshold <NR1>
Syntax 2: MASK:PASSFail:THReshold?
Arguments: <NR1> is the minimum number of mask hits, from 1 to (2**30).
Example: MASK:PASSFAIL:THRESHOLD 2
sets the minimum number of mask hits to 2.
321
MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the minimum number of waveforms to be acquired for mask
pass/fail counting.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform <NR3>
Syntax 2: MASK:PASSFail:WAVEform?
Argument: <NR3> is the minimum number of waveforms to be acquired for mask pass/fail
counting. The range of acquired waveforms is 1 to 2**(30). The default is 20.
Example: MASK:PASSFAIL:WAVEFORM 12
sets the minimum number of waveforms to 12.
322
MASK:SOUrce
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Selects which trace will be compared against the mask(s) when counting is turned
on.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: MASK:SOUrce?
Argument: <x> indicates CH #. It may be 1, 2, 3, or 4. 1 is the default.
Example: MASK:SOURCE CH1
would enable CH1 to be compared against the mask.
323
MASK:STANdard
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Deletes the existing mask and sets the standard mask. If MASK:COUNT:STATE is
ON, then mask counting starts. The query form queries the standard mask.
Group: Mask
Syntax 1: MASK:STANdard { OC1 | OC3 | OC12 | DSOSingle | DSODouble | DSOContra |
DSOTiming | DS1Rate | E1Symmetrical | E1Coax | E2 | E3 | DS3Rate | E4_0 | E4_1 | E5 |
STM1E_0 | STM1E_1 | DS1 | DS1A | DS1C | DS2 | DS3 | DS3Time | DS4NA | DS4NA_Max |
STS1Eye | STS1Pulse | STS3 | STS3_Max | FC133 | FC266 | FC531 | FC1063 | FC133E |
FC266E | FC531E | FC1063E | D2 | D1 | VIDEO360 | ENET1250 | ENET100UTP | ENET100STP |
ENET10IDTime | ENET10IDVolt | ENET10IDFull |ENET10LKTime | ENET10LKVolt |
ENET10LKFull | FDDI | NONe | USERMask }
Syntax 2: MASK:STANdard?
Argument 1: OC1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 ..3 as
specified by OC1/STM0 standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 2: .OC3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by OC3/STM1 standard (155.52 Mb/s).
Argument 3: OC12 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by OC12/STM4 standard (622.08 Mb/s).
Argument 4: DS0Single means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS-0 Single Pulse standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 5: .DS0Double means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS-0 Double Pulse standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 6: DS0Countra means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS-0 Data Pulse, Contradirectional standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 7: DS0Timing means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS-0 Timing Pulse, Contradirectional standard (64 kb/s).
Argument 8: DS1Rate means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks as
specified by the ITU G.703 standard (1.544 Mb/s).
Argument 9: E1Symmetrical means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2
as specified by the E1 Symmetrical Pair standard (2.048 Mb/s).
Argument 10: E1Coax means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the E1 Coaxial Pair standard (2.048 Mb).
Argument 11: E2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the E2 standard (8.448 Mb/s).
Argument 12: E3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the E3 standard (34.368 Mb/s).
324
Argument 13: DS3Rate means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks as
specified by the ITU G.703 standard (44.736 Mb/s).
Argument 14: E4_0 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the E4 Binary 0 standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 15: E4_1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 ..2 as
specified by the E4 Binary 1 standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 16: E5 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the E5 CEPT standard (565 Mb/s).
Argument 17: STM1E_0 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the G.703 Binary 0 standard (155.52 Mb). The SONET standard GR-23-CORE calls
this masks STS-3. ANSI standard T1.102 has STS-3 eye pattern standards.
Argument 18: STM1E_1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the G.703 Binary 1 standard (155.52 Mb/s). The SONET standard GR-23-CORE calls
this masks STS-3. ANSI standard T1.102 has STS-3 eye pattern standards.
Argument 19: DS1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS1 standard (1.544 Mb/s).
Argument 20: DS1A means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS1 standard (2.048 Mb/s).
Argument 21: DS1C means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS1 standard (3.152 Mb/s).
Argument 22: DS2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS2 standard (6.312 Mb/s).
Argument 23: DS3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the DS3 standard (44.736 Mb/s)
Argument 24: DS3Time means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks as
specified by the DS3 standard (44.736 Mb/s). Mask removes 1% of the points from each end of
the DS3 Full Mask to fit mask within 5 ns per division.
Argument 25: DS4NA means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as
specified by the DS4NA eye standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 26: DS4NA_Max means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4
as specified by the DS4NA Maximum equipment output eye standard (139.26 Mb/s).
Argument 27: STS1Eye means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as
specified by the STS-1 Eye standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 28: STSPulse means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the STS-1 Pulse standard (51.84 Mb/s).
Argument 29: STS3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the STS-3 eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).
Argument 30: STS3_Max means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as
specified by the STS-3 Maximum equipment output eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).
325
Argument 31: FC133 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Optical standard (132.7 Mb/s).
Argument 32: FC266 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Optical standard (265.6 Mb/s).
Argument 33: FC531 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Optical standard (531.2 Mb/s).
Argument 34: FC1063 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Optical standard (1.0635 Gb/s).
Argument 35: FC133E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Electrical standard (132.7 Mb/s).
Argument 36: FC266E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Electrical standard (265.6 Mb/s).
Argument 37: FC531E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Electrical standard (531.2 Mb/s).
Argument 38: FC1063E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Electrical standard (1.0635 Gb/s).
Argument 39: D2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4fsc NTSC standard (143.1818 Mb/s).
Argument 40: D1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as
specified by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component serial video standard (270 Mb/s).
Argument 41: VIDEO360 means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks as
implied by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component serial video standard (360 Mb/s).
Argument 42: ENET1250 means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks as
implied by the IEEE Draft P802.3z/D3 standard (1.25 Gb/s).
Argument 43: ENET100UTP means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI X3.263-1995 for Information Technology standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 44: ENET100STP means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI X3.263-1995 for Information Technology standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 45: ENET10IDTime means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s). This mask displays the first
20% of the IDL Full Mask, so that you can see that part of the signal in detail.
Argument 46: ENET10IDVolt means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s). This mask changes the
Vertical scale to zoom in on the middle 20% of the signal while looking at the Full mask on the
time axis.
326
Argument 47: ENET10IDFull means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s).
Argument 48: ENET10LKTime means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s). This mask displays the first
20% of the Link Test Full Mask, so that you can see that part of the signal in detail.
Argument 49: ENET10LKVolt means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s). This mask changes the
Vertical scale to zoom in on the middle 20% of the signal while looking at the Full mask on the
time axis.
Argument 50: ENET10LKFull means delete any user defined masks and then create the masks
as implied by the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange standard (10 Mb/s).
Argument 51: FDDI means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as
specified by the FDDI standard (125 Mb/s).
Argument 52: NONE causes all masks to be deleted. This even includes user masks.
Argument 53: USERMask is a no-op when received by the SET form of this command. It is
allowed because a SET? can get it.
Example: MASK:STANDARD OC3
selects the OC3 standard.
327
MASK:TBPosition
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (No Query Form)
Description: Set the time base position. Use this command to reposition the waveform against
the mask.
Group: Mask
Syntax: MASK:TBPosition <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the time base position in seconds. The maximum range is + or -5 divisions.
Increasing the value moves the trigger position and waveform left on the screen. Decreasing it
moves the trigger position and waveform right. Minimum resolution is 1 ps. The oscilloscope will
round any number entered to the nearest 1 ps. The default is 0 seconds.
Example: MASK:TBPOSITION 1.44e-9
moves the waveform appropriately.
328
MATH<x>?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the definition for the math waveform specified by <x>.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: MATH<x>?
329
MATH<x>:DEFIne
Description: Allows the user to define new waveforms using mathematical expressions. Sending
this command is equivalent to selecting Change Math waveform definition in the Math<x> side
menu.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: MATH<x>:DEFIne <QString>
Syntax 2: MATH<x>:DEFIne?
Argument: <QString> contains the mathematical expression. The expression can include any
amount of white space. Expressions can be either single or dual waveform expressions. <src>
and <function> elements are case independent.
The format for a single waveform expression is:
<function>(<source> [, <window>, <scaling>, <phase suppression>])
The format for a dual waveform expression is:
<source><operator><source>
where:
<function> ::= INV | DIF | FFT | INT
•
INVert (for invert): inverts the defined waveform.
•
DIFferentiate (available with Advanced DSP Math only): takes the derivative of the selected
waveform.
•
FFT (available with Advanced DSP Math only): provides an FFT of the selected waveform. It
uses the format: "FFT(<source>, <window>, <scaling>, <phase suppression>)" where the
window, scaling, and phase suppression arguments in the parentheses are optional. You can
specify these arguments in any order.
<source> refers to a signal channel. Valid choices are: CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, REF1,
REF2, REF3, or REF4.
(The TDS 430A does not include CH3 and CH4.)
<window> refers to an FFT window. Valid choices are: RECtangular, HAMming, HANning,
or BLAckmanharris.
<scaling> provides vertical scaling. Valid choices are: LOGrms, LINearrms,
DEGreesphase, or RADiansphase.
<Phase suppression> is of the range: -100 dB to 100 dB.
•
INTegrate (available on instruments with the Option 2F Advanced DSP Math only): takes the
integral of the selected waveform.
•
<operator> ::= { + | - | * | / (not available on TDS 400A)}
330
•
<source> ::= { CH<x> | REF<x> }
Example 1: MATH2:DEFINE "Ch1 + cH2"
adds channel 1 and channel 2, and stores the result in MATH2.
Example 2: MATH1:DEFINE "INV( ref4 )"
inverts the waveform stored in reference memory location 4 storing the result in MATH1.
Example 3: MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1 )"
takes an FFT on the waveform from channel 1 and stores the result in MATH1.
Example 4: MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1, HAMM, LINEARRMS, 20 )"
takes an FFT from channel 1, using the HAMMING algorithm, with linear rms scaling, and 20 dB
phase suppression. The result is stored in MATH1.
Example 5: MATH1:DEFINE?
might return "Ch2*Ref2" as the expression that defines MATH1.
331
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Some models require Option 2F)
Description: Allows the user to declare at what acquisition number the averaging algorithm will
begin exponential averaging. Prior to that acquisition number, the algorithm uses stable
averaging. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Average in the Math<x> side menu
and entering a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: MATH<x>:NUMAVg { <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MATH<x>:NUMAVg?
Argument: < NR1 > specifies the number of times to successively average the math waveform
before completing an acquisition.
Example 1: MATH2:NUMAVG 10
Successively averages math waveform 2 by 10 times.
Example 2: MATH2:NUMAVG?
might return 10 indicating 10 math 2 waveforms are successively averaged before a single
acquisition occurs.
332
MATH<x>:PROCessing
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Some models require Option 2F)
Description: Allows the user to turn on or off averaging for the math waveform specified by <x>.
Sending this command is equivalent to selecting No Extended Process or Average in the
Math<x> side menu.
Math averaging allows the oscilloscope to successively average any acquisition-related math
waveform. This can help reduce noise in a math waveform.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: MATH<x>:PROCessing { OFF | AVErage }
Syntax 2: MATH<x>:PROCessing?
Argument 1: OFF turns off waveform averaging.
Argument 2: AVErage turns on waveform averaging.
Example 1: MATH1:PROCESSING OFF
ensures that waveform averaging is not in use on math waveform 1.
Example 2: MATH1:PROCESSING AVERAGE
turns on waveform averaging on math waveform 1.
333
MEASUrement?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all measurement parameters.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement?
Example: MEASUREMENT?
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0E+0;LOW 0.0E+0;MID
0.0E+0;MID2 0.0E+0;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0E+0;LOW
10.0E+0;MID 50.0E+0;MID2 50.0E+0
334
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Description: Removes the measurement snapshot display.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Example: MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT
335
MEASUrement:GATing
Description: Sets or queries measurement gating.
Group: Measurement
Related Command: CURSor:VBARS
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:GATing { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:GATing?
Argument 1: ON (or 1) turns on measurement gating.
Argument 2: OFF (or 0) turns off measurement gating.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:GATING ON
turns gating on.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:GATING?
might return MEASUREMENT:GATING 1 showing gating is turned on.
It might also return MEASUREMENT:GATING 0 showing gating is turned off.
336
MEASUrement:IMMed?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:IMMed?
Example: MEASUREMENT:IMMED?
might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s"; SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE; DIRECTION FORWARDS
337
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns information about the immediate delay measurement.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Example: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?
might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE; DIRECTION FORWARDS
338
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Description: Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay "to" edge
when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
command to specify the delay "to" waveform.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction {BACkwards | FORWards}
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
Argument 1: BACkwards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.
Argument 2: FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION?
returns either BACkwards or FORWARDS.
339
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1
Description: Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "from" waveform
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1.
Group: Measurement
Related Command: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1 { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1?
Argument 1: FALL specifies the falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies the rising edge.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1?
returns either RISE or FALL.
340
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
Description: Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "to" waveform when
taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2.
Group: Measurement
Related Command: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?
Argument 1: FALL specifies the falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies the rising edge.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2?
returns FALL showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is used for the immediate
delay measurement.
341
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Description: Sets or queries the source for all single channel immediate measurements and
specifies the source to measure "from" when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase
measurement.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStogram
(TDS500D and 700D }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]?
Argument 1: CH<x> is an input channel.
Argument 2: MATH<x> is a math waveform.
Argument 3: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 4: HIStogram (TDS 500D & 700D) is a histogram.
Example: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE MATH1
specifies MATH1 as the immediate measurement source.
342
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Description: Specifies the source to measure "to" when taking an immediate delay measurement
or phase measurement.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStogram
(TDS500D and 700D }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
Argument 1: CH<x> is an input channel.
Argument 2: MATH<x> is a math waveform.
Argument 3: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 4: HIStogram (TDS 500D & 700D) is a histogram.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 REF3
sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay "to" source when making delay
measurements.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2?
might return MATH1.
343
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Description: Specifies the immediate measurement.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { AMPlitude | AREA | BURst | CARea | CMEan | CRMs |
DELay | EXTINCTDB (TDS 500D & 700D) | EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500D & 700D) | EXTINCTRATIO
(TDS 500D & 700D) | FALL | FREQuency | HIGH | HITS (TDS 500D & 700D) | LOW | MAXimum |
MEAN | MEANDBM (TDS 500D & 700D) | MEDian (TDS 500D & 700D) | MINImum | NDUty |
NOVershoot | NWIdth | PDUTy | PEAKHits (TDS 500D & 700D) | PERIod | PHAse | PK2pk |
POVershoot | PWIdth | RISe | RMS | SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500D & 700D) STDdev (TDS 500D &
700D) | WAVEFORMS (TDS 500D & 700D) }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Argument 1: AMPlitude is the high value minus the low value.
Argument 2: AREA is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.
Argument 3: BURst is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.
Argument 4: CARea (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.
Argument 5: CMEan is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
Argument 6: CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.
Argument 7: DELay is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.
Argument 8: EXTINCTDB (TDS 500D & 700D) is 10.0*log(10)(Extinction Rati0
Argument 9: EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500D & 700D) is 100/Extinction Ration
Argument 10: EXTINCTRATIO (TDS 500D & 700D) is High/Low
Argument 11: FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef
value to a LowRef value of its final value.
Argument 12: FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.
Argument 13: HIGH is the 100% reference level.
Argument 14: HITS (TDS 500D & 700D) displays the number of acquired points within or on the
histogram box.
Argument 15: LOW is the 0% reference level.
Argument 16: MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).
Argument 17: MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
Argument 18: MEANDBM (TDS 500D & 700D) is the median of all acquired points within or on
the histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than this value.
344
Argument 19: MEDian (TDS 500D & 700D) is the median of all acquired points within or on the
histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than this value.
Argument 20: MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).
Argument 21: NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
Argument 22: NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:
NOVershoot = 100 x ((Low - Minimum)/Amplitude)
Argument 23: NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of a
negative pulse.
Argument 24: PDUTy is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
Argument 25: PEAKHits (TDS 500D & 700D) displays the number of acquired points in the
largest bin of the histogram.
Argument 26: PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.
Argument 27: PHAse is the phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated
waveform.
Argument 28: PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
It can be used with both general purpose and histogram measurements. For histogram
measurements, it is the value of the highest nonzero bin minus the value of the lowest nonzero
bin.
Argument 29: POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:
Argument 30: PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of a
positive pulse.
Argument 31: RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.
Argument 32: RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.
Argument 33: SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500D & 700D) is the percentage of points in the histogram which
are within 1, 2, or 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean. In a normal distribution, 66% of
the points are within +-1 standard deviation, 95% of the points are within +- 2 standard deviations,
and 97.5% of the points are within +-3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
Argument 34: STDdev (TDS 500D & 700D) is the standard deviation of all acquired points within
or on the histogram box.
Argument 35: WAVEFORMS (TDS 500D & 700D) is the number of waveforms that have
contributed to the histogram. A waveform is counted even if no points were within the histogram
box.
Example: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE FREQUENCY
defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement.
345
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the units for the immediate measurement.
Group: Measurement
Related Command: MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Syntax: MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?
Return Value: <QString>
returns "V"
for volts, "s"
for seconds, "Hz"
for hertz, "VV"
for volts2,
or "%" for percent.
On the TDS 400A, <Qstring> also returns “c” for clocks, “Vc” fr volt-locks, or “/c? for 1/clks.
Example: MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?
might return "s", indicating that the units for the immediate measurement are seconds.
346
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
(Query Only)
Description: Immediately executes the immediate measurement specified by the
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is taken on the source(s) specified by
a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Return Value: <NR3>
347
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed measurement specified by
<x>.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3?
might return:
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH2;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.
348
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last
statistical reset. Some values may have been ignored because they generated an error.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:COUNT?
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:COUN 3.247000000E+3
349
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by <x>.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY?
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS.
350
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
Description: Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay "to" edge
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<X>:SOURCE2. Sending this command is equivalent to setting the direction
in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction { BACkwards | FORWards }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction?
Argument 1: BACkwards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.
Argument 2: FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS
starts searching from the end of the waveform record.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION?
might return FORWARDS for the search direction.
351
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1
Description: Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "from" waveform
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting the edges
in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1 { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1?
Argument 1: FALL specifies the falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies the rising edge.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
specifies that the rising edge be used for measurement 3.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1?
returns either RISE or FALL for measurement 1.
352
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
Description: Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "to" waveform when
taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2.
Sending this command is equivalent to selecting the edges in the Delay Edges & Direction side
menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2?
Argument 1: FALL specifies the falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies the rising edge.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
specifies that the rising edge be used for the second delay measurement.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2?
might return FALL showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is used for the
second measurement.
353
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical
reset.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM?
might return: :MEASU:MEAS3:MAX 4.18E-9
354
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical
reset.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN?
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-9
355
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the minimum value found for this measurement since the last statistical
reset.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM?
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:MINI 1.75E-9
356
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Description: Sets or queries the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the
source to measure "from" when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStogram
(TDS 500D and 700D) }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?
Argument 1: CH<x> is an input channel.
Argument 2: MATH<x> is a math waveform.
Argument 3: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 4: (TDS 500D & 700D) HIStogram is a histogram
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 MATH1
specifies MATH1 as the measurement 2 source.
357
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Description: Sets or queries the source to measure "to" when taking a delay measurement or
phase measurement. Sending this command is equivalent to setting the source in the Delay from
Selected Wfm side menu or the Phase from Selected Wfm side menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStogram (TDS
500D and 700D) }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?
Argument 1: CH<x> is an input channel.
Argument 2: MATH<x> is a math waveform.
Argument 3: REF<x> is a reference waveform.
Argument 4: (TDS 500D & 700D) HIStogram is a histogram
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH<x>
sets channel 1 as the delay "to" source when making delay measurements.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2?
might return MATH1.
358
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Description: Controls the measurement system. The source specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1 must be selected for the measurement to be displayed. The
source can be selected using the SELect:CH<x> command.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns measurements off. You can also turn the
state off by deselecting the source.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns measurements on.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE ON
turns measurement defined as MEAS1 on.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating the state of MEAS4.
359
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
(TDS 500D & 700D Only)
Description: Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since
the last statistical reset.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Returns: <NR3>
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV?
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:STD 21.0E-12
360
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Description: Sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement specified by MEAS<x>.
Sending this command is equivalent to selecting the measurement in the Select Measurement
side menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { AMPlitude | AREA | BURst | CARea | CMEan | CRMs
| DELay | EXTINCTDB (TDS 500D & 700D) | EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500D & 700D) |
EXTINCTRATIO (TDS 500D & 700D) | FALL | FREQuency | HIGH | HITS (TDS 500D & 700D) |
LOW | MAXimum | MEAN | MEANDBM (TDS 500D & 700D) | MEDian (TDS 500D & 700D) |
MINImum | NDUty | NOVershoot | NWIdth | PDUTy | PEAKHits (TDS 500D & 700D) | PERIod |
PHAse | PK2pk | POVershoot | PWIdth | RISe | RMS | SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500D & 700D) STDdev
(TDS 500D & 700D) | WAVEFORMS (TDS 500D & 700D) }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
Argument 1: AMPlitude is the high value minus the low value or HIGH - LOW.
Argument 2: AREA is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.
Argument 3: BURst is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.
Argument 4: CARea (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.
Argument 5: CMEan is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
Argument 6: CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.
Argument 7: DELay is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.
Argument 8: EXTINCTDB (TDS 500D & 700D) is 10.0*log(10)(Extinction Rati0
Argument 9: EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500D & 700D) is 100/Extinction Ration
Argument 10: EXTINCTRATIO (TDS 500D & 700D) is High/Low
Argument 11: FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef
value to a LowRef value of its final value.
Argument 12: FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in Hertz.
Argument 13: HIGH is the 100% reference level.
Argument 14: HITS (TDS 500D & 700D) displays the number of acquired points within or on the
histogram box.
Argument 15: LOW is the 0% reference level.
Argument 16: MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).
Argument 17: MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
361
Argument 18: MEANDBM (TDS 500D & 700D) is the median of all acquired points within or on
the histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than this value.
Argument 19: MEDian (TDS 500D & 700D) is the median of all acquired points within or on the
histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than this value.
Argument 20: MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).
Argument 21: NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
Argument 22: NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:
NOVershoot = 100 x ((Low - Minimum)/Amplitude)
Argument 23: NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of a
negative pulse.
Argument 24: PDUTy is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
Argument 25: PEAKHits (TDS 500D & 700D) displays the number of acquired points in the
largest bin of the histogram.
Argument 26: PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.
Argument 27: PHAse is the phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated
waveform.
Argument 28: PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
Argument 29: POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:
Argument 30: PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of a
positive pulse.
Argument 31: RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.
Argument 32: RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.
Argument 33: SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500D & 700D) is the percentage of points in the histogram which
are within 1, 2, or 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean. In a normal distribution, 66% of
the points are within +-1 standard deviation, 95% of the points are within +- 2 standard deviations,
and 97.5% of the points are within +-3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
Argument 34: STDdev (TDS 500D & 700D) is the standard deviation of all acquired points within
or on the histogram box.
Argument 35: WAVEFORMS (TDS 500D & 700D) is the number of waveforms that have
contributed to the histogram. A waveform is counted even if no points were within the histogram
box.
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE RMS
specifies MEAS3 to calculate the Root Mean Square voltage.
362
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the units for the measurement specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS?
Return Value: <QString>
returns "V" for volts,
returns "s" for seconds,
returns "HZ" for hertz,
returns "VV" for volts2, or
returns "%" for percent.
Example: MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:UNITS?
might return "%", indicating the units for Measurement 3 are percent.
363
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement specified by <x>.
NOTE: This value is a display value and will be updated perhaps every 1/3 second. If you are
acquiring a long acquisition record, the TDS may take longer than this time to update.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Returns: <NR3>
364
MEASUrement:METHod
Description: Sets or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting the High-Low Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:METHod { HIStogram | MINMax }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:METHod?
Argument 1: HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram
algorithm.
Argument 2: MINMax sets the high and low waveform levels to MAX and MIN, respectively.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:METHOD HISTOGRAM
specifies that the high and low reference levels are set statistically.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:METHOD?
returns MINMAX when the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.
365
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the reference levels.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:REFLevel?
366
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Description: Sets or queries the high reference level, and is the 100% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Argument: <NR3> is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71
sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.
367
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Description: Sets or queries the low reference level, and is the 0% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Argument: <NR3> is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW?
might return 0.0E+0 as the low reference level.
368
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
Description: Sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. Sending this command is equivalent to
setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID?
Argument: <NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID .71
sets the mid reference level to .71 volts.
369
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Description: Sets or queries the mid reference level for the "to" waveform when taking a delay
measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to
ABSolute. Sending this command is equivalent to setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Argument: <NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5
sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0.5 volts.
370
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Description: Specifies which reference levels are used for measurement calculations. Sending
this command is equivalent to setting the levels in the Level Setup side menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod { ABSolute | PERCent }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
Argument 1: ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when precise values are
required. For instance, when designing to published interface specifications such as RS-232-C.
Argument 2: PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to
HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent
commands.
Example 1: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSolute
specifies that explicit user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
Example 2: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD?
returns either ABSOLUTE or PERCENT, indicating the reference levels used.
371
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Description: Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to calculate
the high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to PERCent. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
Argument 1: <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the high reference level. The default is
90%.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95
specifies that the high reference level is set to 95% of HIGH.
372
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Description: Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to calculate
the low reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to PERCent. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Argument: <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the low reference
level. The default is 10%.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW?
might return 15, meaning that the low reference level is 15% of HIGH.
373
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
Description: Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to calculate
the mid reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to PERCent. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID?
Argument: <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference
level. The default is 50%.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 60
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 60% of HIGH.
374
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Description: Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to calculate
the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when taking a delay measurement.
Sending this command is equivalent to setting the Level Setup in the Measure menu.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Argument: <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference level. The default is
50%.
Example: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 40% of HIGH.
375
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Description: Displays the measurement snapshot.
Group: Measurement
Syntax: MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Example: MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT
376
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
Description: Controls the operation and display of measurement statistics.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE { OFF | MINMax | MEANSTDdev }
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE?
Argument 1: OFF turns measurements off. This is the default value.
Argument 2: MINMax turns on statistics and displays the min and max statistics.
Argument 3: MEANSTDdev turns on statistics and displays the mean and standard deviation
statistics.
Example: MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE MINMAX
turns on statistics and displays the min and max statistics.
377
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Description: Controls the responsiveness of mean and standard deviation to waveform changes.
Group: Measurement
Syntax 1: MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting <NR1>
Syntax 2: MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
Argument: <NR1> is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation statistical
accumulations.
Example: MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4
sets the weighting to 4.
378
MESSage
Description: Clears the message window and the MESSage? query returns the current message
parameters.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: MESSage CLEar
Syntax 2: MESSage?
Argument: CLEar removes the message from the message window. This is equivalent to sending
MESSage SHOW "".
Example: MESSAGE CLEAR
clears the message from the window.
379
MESSage:BOX
Description: Defines the size and position of the message window. This command does not
display the window unless MESSage:STATE is ON.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: MESSage:BOX <X1>,<Y1>,<X2>,<Y2>
Syntax 2: MESSage:BOX?
Argument 1: <X1> and <X2> = 0 to 640, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis. <X1>
defines the left and <X2> defines the right side of the window.
Argument 2: <Y1> and <Y2> = 0 to 480, and are pixel positions along the vertical axis. <Y1>
defines the top and <Y2> defines the bottom of the window. The reserved height of all characters
is 15 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully display characters. Shorter windows
clip characters.
380
MESSage:SHOW
Description: Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the
window.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: MESSage:SHOW <QString>
Syntax 2: MESSage:SHOW?
Return Value: <QString> is the message and can include any legal TDS character. The
maximum length of the message is 1000 characters.
The message is left-justified, and is displayed on a single line starting with the top most line in the
window. A line feed character can be embedded in the string to position the message on multiple
lines. You can also use white space and tab characters to position the message within a line.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two characters
representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least significant eight bits of a 16-bit
number. The number specifies the pixel column relative to the left margin of the label area. For
example, to tab to pixel 13, send TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).
The ESC character followed by the @ character turns inverse video on or off and can be
embedded in the message string. The first ESC character followed by a @ character displays all
the text that follows in inverse video until another ESC character followed by a @ character is
found in the string.
NOTE: The use of any escape codes other than those described above may produce
unpredictable results.
The label area is the height and width you have set using the MESSage:Box command. The
length of the label that fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label because the
width of characters varies.
If the message exceeds the limits of the window, either horizontally or vertically, the portion of the
message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. The message string itself is not altered.
The entire message can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed in the
window.
Example 1: MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello world"
displays "Hello world" in the upper left corner of the box (you can define the box size with the
MESSAGE BOX command).
Example 2: MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello >@world>@ ... hello
displays "Hello world ... hello" in the upper left corner of the box and the word "world" is displayed
in inverse video. In this example, > stands for the escape character. The escape character may
appear differently for you depending on your GPIB talker-listener program.
381
MESSage:STATE
Description: Controls the display of the message window.
Group: Display
Syntax 1: MESSage:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: MESSage:STATE?
Argument 1: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the message window from the screen.
Argument 2: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 displays the message window and its contents on the
screen. The size of the window is defined by MESSage:BOX.
382
NEWpass
(No Query Form)
Description: Changes the password that enables access to password protected data. The
PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution
error will be generated.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: PASSWord, *PUD
Syntax: NEWpass <QString>
Argument: <QString> is the new password. The password can include up to 10 characters.
Example: NEWPASS "mypassword"
creates a new password for accessing the user protected data.
383
*OPC
Description: Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) when all pending operations finish. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character "1" into
the output queue when all pending operations are finished. The *OPC? response is not available
to read until all pending operations finish. For a complete discussion of the use of these registers
and the output queue, see page .
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: BUSY?, *WAI
Syntax 1: *OPC
Syntax 2: *OPC?
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your
application program. For more information, refer to the section on Synchronization Methods.
Table 2-31: Commands that Generate an Operation Complete Message
=======================================================
Operation
Command
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Automatic scope adjustment
AUTOSet EXECute
Internal self-calibration
*CAL
Single sequence acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence)
Hardcopy output
HARDCopy STARt
=======================================================
384
*OPT?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns a list of options installed in your oscilloscope.
Group: Status and Error
Syntax: *OPT?
Example: OPT?
Might return: 13:Rs232/cent,1M:extended record length, 2F:math pack,05:video
trigger,0,CD:color display.
385
PASSWord
(No Query Form)
Description: Enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. Sending PASSWord without any
arguments disables these same commands. Once the password is successfully entered, the
*PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the oscilloscope is powered off, or until the
FACtory command, the PASSWord command with no arguments, or the *RST command is
issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the PASSWord command
and then change to your new password with the NEWpass command. Remember that the
password is case sensitive.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: NEWpass, *PUD
Syntax 1: PASSWord
Syntax 2: PASSWord <QString>
Argument: <QString> is the password and can include up to 10 characters. The factory default
password is "XYZZY"and is always valid.
Example 1: PASSWORD "XYZZY"
Enables the *PUB and NEWpass set commands.
Example 2: PASSWORD
Disables the *PUB and NEWpass set commands. You can still use the query version of *PUB.
386
*PSC
Description: Sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the automatic power-on
handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is
set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power-on. When *PSC is false, the
current values in the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in non-volatile memory
when power is shut off and are restored at power-on. For more information, refer to the section on
Registers.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE
Syntax 1: *PSC <NR1>
Syntax 2: *PSC?
Argument 1: <NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear
and allows the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power-on.
Argument 2: <NR1> NOT = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag true. Sending *PSC 1 therefore
enables the power-on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power-on. Using an outof-range value causes an execution warning.
Example 1: *PSC 0
sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
Example 2: *PSC?
might return the value 1, showing that the power-on status clear flag is set to true.
387
*PUD
Description: Sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is protected by the
PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering the correct password. The
password is not necessary to query the data.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: PASSWord
Syntax 1: *PUD <Block>
Syntax 2: *PUD?
Argument: <Block> is a string containing up to 100 characters.
Example 1: *PUD #229This instrument belongs to me
stores the string "This instrument belongs to me" in the user protected data area.
Example 2: *PUD?
might return #221Property of Company X.
388
*RCL
(No Query Form)
Description: Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of its settings stored in memory.
(The settings are stored using the *SAV command.) This command is equivalent to
RECAll:SETUp and performs the same function as the Recall Saved Setup item in the frontpanel Save/Recall Setup menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV,
SAVe:SETUp
Syntax: *RCL <NR1>
Argument: <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, "Data out of range").
Example: *RCL 3
restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3.
389
RECAll:ACQDATA
(TDS 500D & 700D) (No Query Form)
Description: Replaces the indicated channel’s live acquisition data with that saved in the
indicated file.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: RECAll:ACQDATA { <file path>, CH<x> }
Argument 1: <file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is the location
in mass storage memory where the setup will be recalled from.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them,
the TDS will read the file from the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8
characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension. Do not use wild card characters.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
command.
Argument 2: CH <x> is an input channel
Example 1: RECALL:ACQDATA “hd0:/MYFILE.WF1”,CH2
replaces CH2’s data with that stored in hd0:/MYFILE.WF1.
390
RECAll:IMAGEHistogram
(TDS 500D & 700D) (No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Recalls a stored image histogram from disk. DPO mode must be selected, not
Normal mode. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Recall to Image Histogram in
the Save/Recall Waveform menu. Recalling an image histogram stops acquisitions in process.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: RECAll:IMAGEHistogram <file path>
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will recall the waveform from the default directory. <filename> stands
for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension. Do not
use wild card characters.
The default directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
command.
Example: RECALL:IMAGEHISTOGRAM "TEK00000.IMG"
recalls the image histogram stored in the file named TEK00000.IMG.
391
RECAll:SETUp
(No Query Form)
Description: Restores a stored or factory front-panel setup of the oscilloscope. Sending this
command is equivalent to selecting Recall Saved Setup or Recall Factory Setup or Recall
Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax: RECAll:SETUp { FACtory | <NR1> | <file path> }
Argument 1: FACtory selects the factory setup.
Argument 2: <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a setup storage location.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, "Data out of range").
Argument 3: <file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is the location
in mass storage memory where the setup will be recalled from.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them,
the TDS will read the file from the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8
characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension. Do not use wild card characters.
The default directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
command.
Example 1: RECALL:SETUP FACTORY
recalls (and makes current) the front panel setup to its factory defaults.
Example 2: RECALL:SETUP 1
recalls the front panel setup from setup1.
Example 3: RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET"
recalls the front panel setup from the file TEK00000.SET in the default directory and on the default
drive.
392
RECAll:WAVEform
(No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Recalls a stored waveform into a reference location. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Recall File in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>
Argument 1: REF<x> is the location in internal reference memory where the
waveform is recalled from.
Argument 2: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the TDS will recall the waveform from the default directory. <filename> stands
for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension. Do not
use wild card characters.
The default directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
command.
Example: RECALL:WAVEFORM "TEK00000.WFM",REF1
recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000.WFM to reference location 1.
393
REM
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies a comment. This line is ignored by the instrument.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax: REM <QString>
Argument: <QString> is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters.
Example: REM "This is a comment"
is ignored by the instrument.
394
*RST
(No Query Form)
Description: (Reset) returns the oscilloscope to a known set of instrument settings, but does not
purge any aliases or stored settings.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: FACtory, *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax: *RST
*RST does the following:
o Returns the instrument settings to the factory defaults (see Appendix C: Factory Initialization
Settings)
The *RST command does not alter the following:
•
The state of the IEEE Std 488.1-1987 interface
•
The selected IEEE Std 488.1-1987 address of the oscilloscope
•
Calibration data that affect device specifications
•
The Output Queue
•
The Service Request Enable Register setting
•
The Standard Event Status Enable Register setting
•
The Power-on status clear flag setting
•
Alias definitions
•
Stored settings
•
The *PUD? response
395
RS232?
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only) (Query Only)
Description: Queries the RS232 settings.
Group: RS232
Syntax: RS232?
Example: RS232?
might return:
RS232 BAUD: 9600, SOFTFLAGGING: OFF, HARDFLAGGING: ON, PARITY: NONE,
STOPBITS: 1
396
RS232:BAUd
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only)
Description: Sets or queries RS-232-C interface transmission speed.
Group: RS232
Syntax 1: RS232:BAUd <NR1>
Syntax 2: RS232:BAUd?
Argument: <NR1> where <NR1> can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200.
Example: RS232:BAUD 9600
sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud.
397
RS232:HARDFlagging
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only)
Description: Sets or queries the input and output hard flagging over the RS-232 port. It uses the
RFR (Ready For Receive) and CTS (Clear To Send) lines to control data transmission. On output,
the oscilloscope transmits data only when CTS is asserted. When CTS is not asserted, the
oscilloscope stops transmitting data. On input, it asserts RFR until the receive queue is full. Then
it unasserts RFR to stop transmission from an external printer. CTS remains unasserted until the
receive queue is not full. At that time, CTS is asserted again to restart transmission.
Group: RS232
Syntax 1: RS232:HARDFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: RS232:HARDFlagging?
Argument 1: <ON> or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on hardflagging.
Argument 2: <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turns off hardflagging.
Example: RS232:HARDFLAGGING ON
turns on hard flagging.
398
RS232:PARity
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only)
Description: Sets or queries the parity used for all RS-232-C data transfers. Parity adds a bit to
the character sequence. When parity is odd or even, the oscilloscope generates the selected
parity on output and checks all input against the selected parity. When parity is none, the
oscilloscope performs no input parity error checks and generates no output parity.
Group: RS232
Syntax 1: RS232:PARity { EVEN | ODD | NONe }
Syntax 2: RS232:PARity?
Argument 1: EVEN indicates the parity bit is sent with even parity and bytes received are
expected to have even parity.
Argument 2: ODD indicates the parity bit is sent with odd parity and bytes received are expected
to have odd parity.
Argument 3: NONe indicates that no parity bit is sent and none are expected.
Example: RS232:PARITY EVEN
sets the parity to even.
399
RS232:SOFTFlagging
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only)
Description: Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS-232 port. It stops
transmitting data any time it receives an XOFF (DC3) character. It sends an XOFF character
when its 512 byte input buffer has 80 free bytes. The oscilloscope begins transmitting data again
when it receives an XON (DC1) character. It sends XON when its input buffer has 100 free bytes.
Group: RS232
Syntax 1: RS232:SOFTFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: RS232:SOFTFlagging?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on softflagging.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off softflagging.
Example: RS232:SOFTFLAGGING ON
turns on soft flagging.
400
RS232:STOPBits
(RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only)
Description: Sets or queries the number of transmission stop bits sent with each character to
identify the end of data for that character.
Group: RS232
Syntax 1: RS232:STOPBits <NR1>
Syntax 2: RS232:STOPBits?
Argument: <NR1> is 1 or 2.
Example: RS232:STOPBITS 1
sets the number of stop bits to 1.
401
*SAV
(No Query Form)
Description: (Save) stores the state of the oscilloscope into a specified memory location. You
can later use the *RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state. Sending this
command is equivalent to selecting the Save Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax: *SAV <NR1>
Argument: <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an out-ofrange value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this
location will be overwritten.
Example: *SAV 2
saves the current settings in memory location 2.
402
SAVe:ACQDATA
(TDS 500D & 700D) (No Query Form)
Description: Writes out the acquisition data and its characteristics to the indicated file.
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command will only write in the internal data
format.
Group: Save and Recall
Syntax: SAVe:ACQDATA { CH<x> , <file path> }
Argument 1: CH <x> is an input channel
Argument 2: <file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is the location
in mass storage memory where the setup will be saved to.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them,
the TDS will read the file from the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8
characters followed by a period (".") and any 3-char extension. Do not use wild card characters.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
command.
Example 1: SAVE:ACQDATA CH3, “hd0:/MYFILE.WF1”
saves the CH3 acquisition data to the MYFILE.WF1 file on device hd0.
403
SAVe:IMAGEHistogram
(TDS 500D & 700D) (No Query Form) (File System Only)
Description: Stores an image histogram in a mass storage file. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting either the Save Image Histogram item in the Save/Recall Waveform
menu. Saving an image histogram stops acquisitions in process. The file will contain over 400,000
bytes in shallow mode and over 800,000 bytes in deep mode.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Command: RECAll:IMAGEHistogram
Syntax: SAVe:IMAGEHistogram <file path> }
Argument 1: <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do
not specify them, the oscilloscope will write the file to the current directory. <filename> stands for
a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a period (".") and the 3-char extension "IMH".
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example 1: SAVE:IMAGEHISTOGRAM "TEK00000.IMH"
saves an image histogram to the file TEK00000.IMH in the default directory and on the default
drive.
404
SAVe:SETUp
(No Query Form)
Description: Saves the current front-panel setup into the specified memory location. Sending this
is equivalent to selecting the Save Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Commands: DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV
Syntax: SAVe:SETUp { <NR1> | <file path> }
Argument 1: <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an out-ofrange value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this
location will be overwritten.
Argument 2: <file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is a quoted
string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them,
the TDS will write the file to the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8
characters followed by a period (".") and the 3-char extension "SET". We recommend you use
“SET” for the extension to identify files that store setup data.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Settings saved in one TDS oscilloscope may or may not work on a different model TDS or on the
same model TDS with a different version of firmware.
Example 1: SAVE:SETUP 5
saves the current front-panel setup in memory location 5.
Example 2: SAVE:SETUP "TEK00000.SET"
saves the current front-panel setup to the file TEK00000.SET in the current directory and on the
current drive.
405
SAVe:WAVEform
(No Query Form)
Description: Stores a waveform in one of four reference memory locations or a mass storage file.
Sending this command is equivalent to selecting either the Save Waveform or the Save to File
Waveform item in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Command: DELEte:WAVEform
Syntax: SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{ REF<x> | <file path> }
Argument 1: <wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the waveform that will be saved.
Argument 2: REF<x> is the location where the waveform will be stored.
Argument 3: <file path> (on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is a quoted string that
defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>.
<drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the oscilloscope will write
the file to the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by
a period (".") and the 3-char extension "WFM". The TDS 400A and 700D can also use a "CSV"
extension for spreadsheet format files or a "DAT" extension for MathCAD format files.
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the FILESystem:CWD
query.
Example 1: SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH2,REF1
saves the math 2 waveform in reference memory location 2.
Example 2: SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,"TEK00000.WFM"
saves the math1 waveform to the file TEK00000.WFM in the default directory and on the default
drive.
406
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
(Not on TDS 510A)
Description: Specifies the file format for saved waveforms.
Group: Save and Recall
Related Command: SAVE:WAVEform
Syntax 1: SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat ( INTERNal | SPREADSheet | MATHCad }
Syntax 2: SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
Argument 1: INTERNal specifies the internal format. Internal format files have a .wfm extension.
Argument 2: SPREADSheet specifies the spreadsheet format. Spreadsheet format files have a
.CSV extension.
Argument 3: MATHCad specifies the MathCad format. MathCad format files have a .DAT
extension.
If you are writing a MathCad program, you should be aware that the TDS-MathCad file has the
following features:
•
ASCII format
•
first four values contain header information
•
first header value holds the TDS waveform record length
•
second header value holds time, in seconds, between samples
•
third header value holds the trigger position (expressed as an index in the data position. For
extended-acquisition-length records, the index reported can be outside the waveform because
the trigger can be outside the waveform. If before the waveform, it’s negative. If after, it’s a
large positive)
•
fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position
•
delimiters are carriage returns
Example: SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET
specifies the waveform, when saved, will be stored in a spreadsheet-compatible format.
407
SELect?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the selected waveform and the display status of all waveforms.
Group: Vertical
Syntax: SELect?
Example: SELECT?
might return :SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;MATH2 0;MATH3 0;REF1
0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4 0
408
SELect:<wfm>
Description: Controls the display and selection of waveforms. There can be up to eleven
waveforms displayed at one time, but only one waveform can be selected at a time. The selected
waveform is the waveform that was most recently turned on. This command is equivalent to
pressing a front-panel CH or MORE button. <wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x> except
in extended-acquisition-length and DPO modes where MATH<x> is no used.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: SELect:<wfm> { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: SELect:<wfm>?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns on the display of the specified waveform. The
waveform also becomes the selected waveform.
Example 1: SELECT:CH2 ON
turns the channel 2 display on and selects channel 2.
Example 2: SELECT:REF1?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the REF1 waveform is selected.
409
SELect:CONTROl
Description: Sets or queries the waveform that is currently affected by the cursor and vertical
commands.
<wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x> except in extended-acquisition-length and DPO
modes where MATH<x> is not used.
Group: Vertical
Syntax 1: SELect:CONTROl <wfm>
Syntax 2: SELect:CONTROl?
Argument: <wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the selected waveform.
Example: SELECT:CONTROL?
might return CH1 as the selected waveform.
410
SET?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns a string listing the oscilloscope settings, except for configuration information
for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in
when you made the SET? query. This command is identical to the *LRN? command.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose
Syntax: SET?
NOTE: The SET? query always returns a string with command headers, regardless of the setting
of the HEADer command. This is because the returned string is intended to be able to be sent
back to the oscilloscope as a command string. The VERBose command can still be used to
specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length.
Example: SET?
a partial return string may look like this:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:APPMENU:TITLE "Application Menu";LABEL:BOTTOM1 "";BOTTOM2 "";BOTTOM3
"";BOTTOM4 ""; BOTTOM5 "";BOTTOM6 "";BOTTOM7 "";RIGHT1 "";RIGHT2 "";
RIGHT3 "";RIGHT4 "";RIGHT5 "";:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1; :ALIAS:STATE
0;:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;FILTER SINX;PERSISTENCE 500.0E3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 75;TEXT
60;CONTRAST 150;:MESSAGE:SHOW "hello";STATE 1;BOX 74,84,475,135;:LOCK
NONE; :HARDCOPY:FORMAT EPSIMAGE;PORT GPIB;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;
411
*SRE
Description: (Service Request Enable) sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER). For more information, refer to the section on Registers.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?,
EVMSg?, FACtory, *PSC, *STB?
Syntax 1: *SRE <NR1>
Syntax 2: *SRE?
Argument: <NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the SRER are set
according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error. The power-on
default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER maintains its value through a power
cycle.
Example 1: *SRE 48
sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary.
Example 2: *SRE?
might return a value of 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value 00100000.
412
*STB?
(Query Only)
Description: (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR)
using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For more information, refer to the section on
Registers.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?,
EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE
Syntax: *STB?
Return Value: <NR1>
Example: *STB?
might return the value 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000.
413
TEKSecure
Description: Initializes both waveform and setup memories. This overwrites any previously stored
data.
TEKSecure writes zeros in all waveform reference memory, regardless of selected record length,
and puts all setups in the factory init state.
TEKSecure then verifies that the waveform and setup memory are in the desired state. It displays
a pass or a fail notifier on completion.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax: TEKSecure
414
TIMe
Description: Sets or queries the time that the oscilloscope can display.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: DATE, DISplay:CLOCk
Syntax 1: TIMe <QString>
Syntax 2: TIMe?
Argument: <QString> is a date in the form "hh:mm:ss".
hh refers to the hour number from 1 to 24.
mm refers to the minute number in the hour from 0 to 59.
ss refers to the seconds number in the minute from 0 to 59.
There must be a colon after the hh and after the mm.
Example: TIME "01:24:00"
specifies that the time is set to 01:24 AM.
415
TRIGger
Description: Forces a trigger event to occur, and the TRIGger query returns the current trigger
parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger FORCe
Syntax 2: TRIGger?
Argument: FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is REAdy, the acquisition will
complete, otherwise this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel
FORCE TRIGGER button.
Example 1: TRIGGER FORCe
forces a trigger event to occur.
Example 2: TRIGGER?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;HOLDOFF:VALUE
0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1; COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE;
THRESHOLD:CH1 1.40E+0; CH2 1.200E+0;CH3 1.200E+0;CH4
1.200E+0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3
X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW
800.0E-3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0E-9;WHEN
WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;BY
TIME; EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC; :TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 16.0E9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
416
TRIGger:DELay
Description: Sets the delayed trigger level and returns the current delayed trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay SETLevel
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay?
Argument: SETLevel sets the delayed trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to selecting Set to 50% in the Delayed
Edge Level side menu.
Example 1: TRIGGER:DELAY SETLEVEL
sets the delayed trigger level to 50% of MAX and MIN.
Example 2: TRIGGER:DELAY?
might return
:TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0E+0;BY TIME;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE
RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 16.0E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
417
TRIGger:DELay:BY
Description: Selects whether the delayed trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a
specified period of time after the main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Delay by in the
Delayed Trig menu.
Group: Trigger
Related Commands: TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:BY { EVENTS | TIMe | EVENTSTime (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D
only) | RUNSAfter }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:BY?
Argument 1: EVENTS
sets the delayed trigger to occur after a set number of trigger events after the main trigger. The
number of events is specified by
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt.
Argument 2: TIMe
sets the delayed trigger to occur a set time after the main trigger event. The time period is
specified by TRIGger:DELay:TIMe.
Argument 3: EVENTSTime (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D only) sets a specified time after a
specified number of delay trigger trigger events - after the main trigger event. For example in
examining a pulse train, you might use the main trigger to detect the start of the train, then use the
delay by events to go to the position of interest within the pulse train, and then use the time delay
to wait a specified time period before starting the data acquisition.
Argument 4: RUNSAfter looks for a main trigger, then waits a user-specified time, then starts
acquiring data.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:BY?
might return EVENTS.
418
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the coupling, slope, and source for the delayed trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?
might return :TRIGGER:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC
419
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling
Description: Selects the type of coupling for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Coupling in the Delayed Trig menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1:
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling { AC (TDS 400A & 510A) | DC | HFRej (TDS 400A & 510A) |
LFRej (TDS 400A & 510A) | MAINTrigger (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D only) | NOISErej }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling?
Argument 1: AC selects AC trigger coupling (TDS 400A & 510A).
Argument 2: DC selects DC trigger coupling.
Argument 3: HFRej coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal (TDS
400A & 510A).
Argument 4: LFRej coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal (TDS 400A
& 510A).
Argument 5: MAINTrigger coupling sets the delayed trigger coupling to match the setting on the
main trigger (TDS 400A & 510A).
Argument 6: NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity.
Example 1: TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING DC
sets the delay trigger to DC coupling.
Example 2: TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING?
might return LFREJ for the delayed trigger coupling.
420
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe
Description: Selects either a rising or falling edge for the delayed trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Slope in the Delayed Trig menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe { RISe | FALL }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe?
Argument 1: FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Argument 2: RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE?
might return RISE, indicating that the delayed trigger occurs on the rising edge.
421
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce
Description: Selects the source for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Source in the Delayed Trig menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1:
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce { AUXiliary
(not available on TDS 520D & 724D) | CH<x> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce?
Argument 1: AUXiliary specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
that is located on the rear panel of the instrument. The TDS 520D & 724D do not have an
Auxiliary Trigger input and so do not support this argument.
Argument 2: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
selects channel 1 as the input source for the delayed trigger.
422
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the current delayed trigger event parameter.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?
might return :TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 2
423
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt
Description: Sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the delayed trigger
occurs when TRIGger:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS. This is equivalent to setting the Delay by
Events count in the Delayed Edge Delay side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt?
Argument: <NR1> is the number of delayed edge trigger events. The TDS 400A range is 1 to
(10E7-1). The TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, and 700D range is 2 to 10E7.
Example 1: TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 4
specifies that the delayed trigger will occur four trigger events after the main trigger.
Example 2: TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT?
might return 2, indicating that two events must occur after the main trigger before the delayed
trigger can occur.
424
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel
Description: Selects the level of the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to setting LEVel
in the Delayed Trig menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:LEVel?
Argument 1: ECL specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
Argument 2: TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the delayed trigger level, in volts.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL 2E-3
sets the delayed trigger level to 2 mV.
425
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe
Description: Sets or queries the delay time when HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to TRIGAfter.
This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter command, and is equivalent
to setting the Delay by Time value in the Delayed Edge Delay side menu.
When HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to RUNSAfter, the delay time is set by the
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter command.
Group: Trigger
Related Commands:
HORizontal:DELay:MODe, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter,
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:TIMe?
Argument: <NR3> is the delay time, in seconds.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 4E-6
sets the delay time to 4 us.
426
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe
Description: Sets or queries the type of delayed trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:DELay:TYPe EDGE
Syntax 2: TRIGger:DELay:TYPe?
Argument: EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction. Use the TRIGger:DELay:LEVel and
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe commands to set the voltage level and direction respectively.
Example: TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE?
always returns EDGE as the type of delayed trigger.
427
TRIGger:MAIn
Description: Sets the main trigger level and returns the current main trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn SETLevel
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn?
Argument: SETLevel sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel SET LEVel
TO 50% button.
This argument works differently with AMI Communications Triggering settings. Specifically, when
AMI is chosen, this command measures the peak-to-peak level and sets an upper threshold value
at 75% and a lower threshold value at 25% of the peak-to-peak value. If the pulse form is CMI,
NRZ, or an Eye Diagram, the level is set to 50%.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN SETLEVEL
sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX and MIN.
428
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger AMI pulse form to one of three
possibilities.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm { PLUSOne | MINUSOne |
EYEdiagram }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm?
Argument 1: PLUSOne corresponds to the Isolated +1 on the front panel menu. This is the
default value.
Argument 2: MINUSOne corresponds to the Isolated -1.
Argument 3: EYEdiagram corresponds to Eye Diagram.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE
sets the AMI pulseform to the Isolated +1.
429
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the AMI communication trigger’s high threshold value in volts. The
threshold works identically to the threshold in Pulse Slewrate.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument: <NR3> is the high value of the threshold. The unit of measure is volts. The default is
+0.5 volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.8 E-2
sets the high threshold to 28 milliVolts.
430
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the AMI communication trigger’s low threshold value in volts. The
threshold works identically to the threshold in Pulse Slewrate.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW?
Argument: <NR3> is the low value of the threshold. The unit of measure is volts. The default is 0.5 volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW -2.8 E-2
sets the low threshold to -28 milliVolts.
431
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger signal bit rate. If this command changes
the bit rate, the command then also causes the communication standard to set to “custom”. If
both the TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANDard command and the
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate command are used, the last one executed takes
precedence.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate { <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate?
Argument: <NR3> is the bit rate in bits per second. The default is 1.5444E+6.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:BITRATE 1.053 E+8
sets the bit rate to 105.3 Mb/s.
432
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger CMI pulse form to one of three
possibilities.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm { PLUSOne | MINUSOne |
EYEdiagram | ZERO }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm?
Argument 1: PLUSOne corresponds to triggering on a positive mark. This is the default value.
Argument 2: MINUSOne corresponds to triggering on a negative mark.
Argument 3: EYEdiagram corresponds to Eye Diagram.
Argument 4: ZERO corresponds to triggering on a Zero bit.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:CMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE
selects triggering on a positive mark.
433
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger signal code. If this command changes the
code, this command also sets the standard to custom.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe { AMI | CMI | NRZ }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe?
Argument 1: AMI refers to the Alternate Mark Inversion encoding scheme. This is the default.
Argument 2: CMI refers to the Coded Mark Inversion encoding scheme.
Argument 3: NRZ refers to Non-Return to Zero codes.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:CODE AMI
selects the AMI communication code
434
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger NRZ pulse form to one of 19 possibilities.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm { EYEdiagram | RISE | FALL |
PATTERN0 | PATTERN1 | PATTERN2 | PATTERN3 | PATTERN4 | PATTERN5 | PATTERN6 |
PATTERN7 | P0 | P1 | P2 | P3 | P4 | P5 | P6 | P7 }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm?
Argument 1: Eyediagram selects an Eye Diagram image. This is the default value.
Argument 2: RISE selects a positive edge trigger.
Argument 3: FALL selects a negative edge trigger.
Argument 4: PATTERN0 causes a trigger on Pattern0. Intersymbol interference can be identified
with the Pattern Violations Trigger. The leading symbol (0, 1, x) and trailing symbol (0, 1, x) are bit
values that precede or follow the three symbols of interest (in the middle). The underlying trigger
that implements Pattern Violation Triggering is pulse width triggering.
Argument 5: PATTERN1 causes a trigger on Pattern1 1 001 x.
Argument 6: PATTERN2 causes a trigger on Pattern2 x 010 x.
Argument 7: PATTERN3 causes a trigger on Pattern3 x 011 0.
Argument 8: PATTERN4 causes a trigger on Pattern4 1 100 1.
Argument 9: PATTERN5 causes a trigger on Pattern5 x 101 x.
Argument 10: PATTERN6 causes a trigger on Pattern6 0 110 x.
Argument 11: PATTERN7 causes a trigger on Pattern7 0 111 0.
Argument 12: P0 is a synonym for PATTERN0
Argument 13: P1 is a synonym for PATTERN1
Argument 14: P2 is a synonym for PATTERN2
Argument 15: P3 is a synonym for PATTERN3
Argument 16: P4 is a synonym for PATTERN4
Argument 17: P5 is a synonym for PATTERN5
Argument 18: P6 is a synonym for PATTERN6
Argument 19: P7 is a synonym for PATTERN7
435
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:CODE:NRZ:PULSEFORM EYEDIAGRAM
selects a trigger on an Eye Diagram image.
436
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the source for the main communication trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting the source in the Communication Source side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce?
Argument: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE CH2
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main communication trigger.
437
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard
(TDS 500D & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the communication trigger standard which identifies the code and bit
rate. If this command changes the code, then the pulse form is changed to the last pulse form that
was set for that code.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard { DS1 | DS1A | DS1C | DS2 | DS3 | DS3
Rate | DS4NA | E1 | E2 | E3 | E4 | E5 | STS1 | STS3 | OC1 | OC3 | OC12 | STM1E | FC133 |
FC266 | FC531 | FC1063 | FDDI | D1 | D2 | ENET1250 | ENET10 |ENET100 | VIDEO360 | Custom
}
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard?
Argument 1: DS1 refers to DS1 (1.544 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 2: DS1A refers to DS1A (2.048 Mbs/s) AMI standard.
Argument 3: DS1C refers to DS1C (3.152 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 4: DS2 refers to DS2 (6.312 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 5: DS3 refers to DS3 (44.736 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 6: DS3 Rate refers to the ITU G.703 (44.736 Mb/s) standard.
Argument 7: DS4Na refers to DS4NA (139.26 Mb/s) CMI standard.
Argument 8: E1 refers to E1 (2.048 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 9: E2 refers to E2 (8.44 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 10: E3 refers to E3 (34.368 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 11: E4 refers to E4 (139.26 Mb/s) CMI standard.
Argument 12: E5 refers to E5 or CEPT (565 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 13: STS1 refers to STS-1 (51.84 Mb/s) AMI standard.
Argument 14: STS3 refers to STS-3 (155.52 Mb/s) CMI standard.
Argument 15: OC1 refers to OC1/STM0 (51.84 Mb/s) CMI standard.
Argument 16: OC3 refers to OC3/STM1 ((155.52 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 17: OC12 refers to OC12/STM4 (622.08 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 18: STM1E refers to STM1E (155.52 Mb/s) CMI standard.
Argument 19: FC133 refers to FC133 (132.7 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
438
Argument 20: FC266 refers to FC266 (265.6 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 21: FC531 refers to FC531 (531.2 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 22: FC1063 refers to FC1063 (1.063 Gb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 23: FDDI refers to FDDI (125 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 24: D1 refers to 4:2:2 or D1 (270 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 25: D2 refers to 4fsc NTSC or D2 (143.18 Mb/s) NRZ standard.
Argument 26: ENET1250 refers to the IEEE Draft P802.3z/D3 (1.25 Gb/s) standard.
Argument 27: ENET10 refers to the ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Fifth Edition 1996 - Information
Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange (10 Mb/s) standard.
Argument 28: ENET100 refers to the ANSI X3.263-1995 for Information Technology (125 Mb/s)
standard.
Argument 29: VIDEO360 refers to the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component serial video (360
Mb/s) standard.
Argument 30: CUSTom can take a non-standard, floating-point bit rate. <NR3>.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD E4
selects the E4 communication standard.
439
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the trigger coupling, source, and slope for the main edge trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?
might return SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE
440
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling
Description: Sets or queries the type of coupling for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to
setting Coupling in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling { AC | DC | HFRej | LFRej | NOISErej }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling?
Argument 1: AC selects AC trigger coupling.
Argument 2: DC selects DC trigger coupling.
Argument 3: HFRej coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal.
Argument 4: LFRej coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal.
Argument 5: NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity. It requires added signal amplitude for more
stable, less false triggering.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING DC
sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC.
441
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
Description: Selects a rising or falling slope for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting
Slope in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe?
Argument 1: FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Argument 2: RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
sets the main edge trigger to occur on the rising slope.
442
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
Description: Sets or queries the source for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting
Source in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce { AUXiliary (not available on TDS 520D & 724D) |
CH<x> | LINE }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce?
Argument 1: AUXiliary specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
that is located on the rear panel of the instrument. The TDS 520D & 724D do not have an
Auxiliary Trigger input and so do not support this argument.
Argument 2: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.
Argument 3: LINE specifies AC line voltage.
Example 1: TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE LINE
specifies the AC line voltage as the main edge trigger source.
Example 2: TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE?
might return CH2 for the main edge trigger source.
443
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
(Query Only)
Description: For the TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D, returns the main trigger holdoff default (TIMe or
DEFAult) and main trigger holdoff time. For the TDS 400A & 510A, returns the main trigger holdoff
value.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?
for the TDS 500D, 600B, and 700D, might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME 250.0E-9;BY DEFAULT
or, for the TDS 400A and 510A, might return:
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 0.
444
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal?
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main trigger holdoff value in seconds. This is equivalent to selecting
Mode & Holdoff from the main Trigger menu and viewing the value in the side menu Holdoff
Default or Holdoff Time items (whichever is highlighted).
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:ACTUal?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?
might return 4E-6 showing the holdoff time is set to 4 us.
445
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff default. This is equivalent to selecting Mode
& Holdoff from the main Trigger menu, then setting Default Holdoff or Holdoff (Time) in the
resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY { TIMe | DEFAult }
Argument 1: TIMe enables the user to set the holdoff time.
Argument 2: DEFault automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time is typically
equivalent to the greater of 1/2 screen (5 divisions) or time of 250 ns. The maximum value is 12
seconds. For example, if the oscilloscope is set to 1 msec/division then the default holdoff will be
1 msec/division x 25 divs = 25 msec..
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY TIME
sets the holdoff to the by time setting. This enables the user to set the holdoff time.
446
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff time. This is equivalent to setting Holdoff
Time in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe?
Argument: <NR3> holdoff time in seconds. The range is 250 ns to 12.0 seconds.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME 10
sets the holdoff time to be 10 seconds.
447
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue
(TDS 400A & 510A)
Description: Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting Holdoff
in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue?
Argument: <NR1> is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 10
sets the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.
448
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
Description: Sets the main trigger level. This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel
TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL knob.
With Communications triggers, this command makes no change to AMI thresholds. It does
change CMI and NRZ levels. It makes no change to value ranges.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel?
Argument 1: ECL specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
Argument 2: TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.
Example 1: TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL?
might return TTL, indicating that the main edge trigger is set to 1.4 V.
Example 2: TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.5
sets the main trigger level to 0.5 V.
449
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns all main logic trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;WHEN
TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE
450
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the type of main logic trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Class in the Trigger menu when the Type is set to Logic.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss { PATtern | STATE | SETHold (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
}
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss?
Argument 1: PATtern means that the instrument triggers when the specified logical combinations
of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
Argument 2: STATE means that the instrument triggers when the specified conditions of
channels 1, 2, and 3 are met after the channel 4 condition is met.
Argument 3: SETHold means the oscilloscope will trigger on the setup and hold violations
between a data source and a clock source (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D).
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS?
might return STATE.
451
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the main logic
trigger.
When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is PATtern, this command applies to channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is STATE, only channels 1, 2, and 3 are logically combined.
This command is equivalent to selecting the function in the Logic Pattern Function side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion { AND | NANd | NOR | OR }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Argument 1: AND specifies that the instrument will trigger if all the conditions are true.
Argument 2: NANd specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are false.
Argument 3: NOR specifies that the instrument will trigger if all of the conditions are false.
Argument 4: OR specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are true.
Example 1: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION NOR
sets the logical combination of channels to be true when none of the conditions are true.
Example 2: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION?
might return NAND.
452
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main logic trigger input for all channels.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X
453
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for the specified channel. The channel is
specified by <x> and is 1, 2, or 3. This is equivalent to setting the inputs in the Logic Pattern
Inputs side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> { HIGH | LOW | X }
Syntax 3: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Argument 1: HIGH specifies logic high.
Argument 2: LOW specifies logic low.
Argument 3: X specifies a do not care state.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 LOW
sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 2.
454
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. These are the inputs used
when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent to setting the channel 4
input in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.
Group: Trigger
Related Command: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 { HIGH | LOW | X }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
Argument 1: HIGH specifies logic high.
Argument 2: LOW specifies logic low.
Argument 3: X specifies a do not care state.
Example 1: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 LOW
sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 4 when the logic class is set to PATtern.
Example 2: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4?
might return X, indicating that the logic input for channel 4 is do not care.
455
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries a condition for generating a main logic pattern trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1:
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn { TRUe | FALSe | LESSThan | MOREThan }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn?
Argument 1: TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes true.
Argument 2: FALSe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes false.
Argument 3: LESSThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true less than the
LESSLimit. (see Figure 2-5 and
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.
Argument 4: MOREThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true longer than the
more limit. (see Figure 2-5 and
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.
Figure 2-5: LESSThan and MOREThan Arguments
456
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the maximum time the selected pattern may be true and still
generate a main logic pattern trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn: LESSLimit?
Argument: <NR3> time to hold pattern true.
457
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the minimum time the selected pattern may be true and still
generate a main logic pattern trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn: MORELimit?
Argument: <NR3> time to hold pattern true.
458
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold violation triggering. This is
equivalent to selecting Define Clock from the main Trigger menu and Polarity in the resulting
side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Argument 1: FALL specifies falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies rising edge.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
specifies the polarity as the rising edge.
459
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic setup/hold clock voltage trigger level. This is
equivalent to selecting Levels from the main Trigger menu and Clock Level in the resulting side
menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel?
Argument 1: ECL specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
Argument 2: TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:LEVEL 1.4
sets the main logic trigger setup/hold clock level to 1.4 volts.
460
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the source for the clock for the main logic trigger setup/hold input.
The channel is specified by the <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting Define
Clock from the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Argument: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4).
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH2
selects Channel 2 as the clock source for the main logic trigger setup/hold.
461
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic set/hold data level. This is equivalent to selecting
Levels from the main Trigger menu and Data Level in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel?
Argument 1: ECL specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
Argument 2: TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
Argument 3: <NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:LEVEL 1.4
specifies the main logic setup/hold data level to 1.4 volts.
462
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the data channel for the main logic trigger set/hold input. The
channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting Data Source from
the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
Argument: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4).
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main logic trigger set/hold.
463
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger hold time. This is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Hold Time in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time occur
after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTime 200 E-12
sets the main logic trigger sethold holdtime to 200 nanoseconds.
464
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger set time. This is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Setup Time in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the setup time setting in seconds. Positive values occur before the
clock edge. Negative values occur after the clock edge.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 600 E-12
sets the main logic trigger sethold time to 600 nanoseconds.
465
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. This input is used when
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to STATE. This is equivalent to setting the channel 4 input in
the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 { FALL | RISe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?
Argument 1: FALL specifies falling edge.
Argument 2: RISe specifies rising edge.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE
specifies that the main logic trigger input for channel 4 is the rising edge when the logic class is
set to STATE.
466
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic state trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:STATE:WHEn { TRUe | FALSe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc: STATE: WHEn?
Argument 1: TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the condition is met on the fourth channel
and the pattern of the first three channels are at the desired states.
Argument 2: FALSe
467
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main logic trigger threshold voltage for all channels.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0
468
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the main logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified by
<x>. This is equivalent to setting the thresholds in the Logic State Threshold and Logic Pattern
Threshold side menus.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument: <NR3> specifies the threshold voltage.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 .5
sets the main logic trigger threshold for channel 1 to .5 volts.
469
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Specifies whether the main logic trigger occurs when the specified state goes true
or false when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent to selecting
Trigger When in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn { FALSe | TRUe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN TRUE
specifies that the main logic trigger when the logic pattern is true.
470
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
Description: Sets or queries the main trigger mode. This command is equivalent to selecting
Mode & Holdoff in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:MODe { AUTO | NORMal }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:MODe?
Argument 1: AUTO generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific time period.
Argument 2: NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO
specifies that a trigger event is automatically generated.
471
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main pulse trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1; GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER
ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW 800.0E3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0E-9;WHEN
WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE
as the current main pulse trigger parameters.
472
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the type of pulse to trigger on. This command is equivalent to
selecting Class in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss { GLItch | RUNT | WIDth | SLEWRate (TDS 500D, 600B,
& 700D) | TIMEOut (TDS 500D, 600B, 700D) }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss?
Argument 1: GLItch triggers when a pulse is found that is of the specified polarity and width.
These are set with the commands TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth.
Argument 2: RUNT triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The thresholds are set with the
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
commands. The crossing can be either positive or negative as specified by
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity.
Argument 3: WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either
inside or outside the limits as specified by
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit.
The polarity is selected using the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity command.
Argument 4: SLEWRate triggers when the slew rate of the source violates the specified
conditions (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D).
Argument 5: TIMEOut triggers when the pulse train stops in the selected state for longer than the
specified time (TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D).
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH
specifies a width pulse for the main trigger.
473
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the current main glitch pulse trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1; GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER
ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE.
474
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Controls glitch detection. This command is equivalent to selecting Filter in the
Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer { ACCept | REJect }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer?
Argument 1: ACCept specifies that the oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that are narrower
than the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse glitch. The width is specified
using the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command.
Argument 2: REJect specifies that the oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that are wider than
the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse glitch. The width is specified using
the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER?
returns either ACCEPT or REJECT, indicating whether glitches are filtered.
475
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1:
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive | POSITIVe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY EITHER
specifies that the polarity of the glitch can be either positive or negative.
476
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the width for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?
Argument: <NR3> is the width of the glitch, in seconds.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH 15E-6
sets the width of the glitch to 15 us.
477
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the current parameters for the main pulse runt trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW
800.0E-3.
478
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive | POSITIVe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
Argument 1: NEGAtive indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising
edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold.
Argument 2: POSITIVe indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold.
Argument 3: EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE
specifies that the polarity of the main pulse runt trigger is negative.
479
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the upper and lower thresholds for the main pulse runt trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW 800.0E-3.
480
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the trigger level switching thresholds for the main pulse runt trigger.
This command is equivalent to setting Set to TTL or Set to ECL in the Main Pulse Runt Trigger
menu's Thresholds side menu item.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh { ECL | TTL }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh?
Argument 1: ECL sets the upper threshold to -1.1 V and the lower threshold to -1.5 V.
Argument 2: TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL
sets the threshold of the pulse runt trigger to the nominal TTL voltage levels.
481
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument: <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3
sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 120 mV.
482
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?
Argument: <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3
sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV.
483
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a
runt. This is equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger's Pulse, Runt menu and
Occurs or Wider Than in the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn { OCCurs | WIDERthan }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn?
Argument 1: OCCurs specifies a trigger if a runt of any detectable width occurs.
Argument 2: WIDERthan specifies a trigger if a runt of greater than the specified width occurs.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN WIDERTHAN
sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the
specified width.
484
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the minimum width for a valid main pulse runt trigger. This
command is equivalent to entering a value in the Trigger menu's Wider Than side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
Argument: <NR3> is the minimum width in seconds.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6
sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 us.
485
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the slew rate trigger. This is
equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger's Slew Rate menu and Delta Time in
the resulting side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:DELTATime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:DELTATime?
Argument: <NR3> is the delta time in seconds.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTATIME 15E-6
sets the slew rate trigger's delta time to 15 us.
486
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse slew rate trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu with Type set to SlewRate.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive | POSITIVe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
Argument 1: NEGAtive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for slew rate triggering to occur.
Argument 2: POSITIVe indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most negative)
to higher (most positive) level for slew rate triggering to occur.
Argument 3: EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY EITHER
specifies that the polarity of the slew rate can be either positive or negative.
487
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEWRate?
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the slew rate value. This is the:
((Upper Threshold - Lower Threshold) / Delta Time)
The value is limited to the three most significant digits.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEWRate?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEWRATE?
returns the slew rate. It is given as an appropriate amount of volts per second. For example,
1.2E+6 would represent a slew rate of 1.2 megavolts/second.
488
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets the upper and lower slew rate trigger thresholds. This is equivalent to selecting
Thresholds from the main Trigger's Slew Rate menu and entering a value in the resulting side
menu's High Threshold or Low Threshold items.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh { TTL | ECL }
Argument 1: TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.
Argument 2: ECL sets the upper threshold to -1.1 V and the lower threshold to -1.5 V.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL
sets the trigger threshold to TTL.
489
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the upper (most positive) limit of the two threshold levels that a
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is equivalent to setting
the higher threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger's Thresholds side menu item.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument: <NR3> is the threshold, in volts
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3
sets the upper limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 120 mV.
490
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the lower (most negative) limit of the two threshold levels that a
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is equivalent to setting
the lower threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger's Thresholds side menu item.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW?
Argument: <NR3> is the threshold, in volts
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3
sets the lower limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 50 mV.
491
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries whether to check for a slewing signal that is faster or slower than
the specified delta time. This is equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger's
Slew Rate menu and entering a value in the resulting side menu's Trig if Less Than or Trig if
Greater Than items.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:WHEn { FASTERthan | SLOWERthan }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:WHEn?
Argument 1: FASTERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is faster than the set
volts/second rate.
Argument 2: SLOWERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is slower than the set
volts/second rate.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN FASTERTHAN
sets the slew rate trigger to work when the slew is faster than the set volts/second rate.
492
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the source for the main pulse trigger. This is equivalent to selecting
the source in the Pulse Runt Source side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce?
Argument: CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH2
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main pulse trigger.
493
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse timeout trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu with Type set to Time out.
Group:Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity { STAYSHigh (or POSITIVe) | STAYSLow (or
NEGAtive) | EITHer }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?
Argument 1: STAYSLow (or NEGAtive) indicates that a pulse edge must stay low the required
time period for timeout triggering to occur.
Argument 2: STAYSHigh (or POSITIVe) indicates that a pulse edge must stay high the required
time period for timeout triggering to occur.
Argument 3: EITher indicates either STAYSHigh or STAYSLow polarity.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY EITHER
specifies that the polarity of the timeout trigger can be either positive or negative.
494
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D Only)
Description: Sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time, in seconds. This command is
equivalent to selecting Time in the Trigger menu and entering a value with the keypad or general
purpose knob.
Group:Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?
Argument: <NR3> is the timeout time period, in seconds
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME 3.134E-6
sets the timeout time to 3.134 us.
495
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the width parameters for the main pulse width trigger.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?
might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0E-9;WHEN
WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE
as the current main pulse trigger parameters.
496
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equivalent to
setting Upper Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?
Argument: <NR3> is the upper limit, in seconds.
497
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equivalent to
setting Lower Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?
Argument: <NR3> is the lower limit, in seconds.
498
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse width trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting the polarity in the Pulse Width Polarity side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity { NEGAtive | POSITIVe }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
Argument 1: NEGAtive specifies a negative pulse.
Argument 2: POSITIVe specifies a positive pulse.
499
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Selects the condition when the trigger occurs. This is equivalent to selecting the
condition in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn { OUTside | WIThin }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?
Argument 1: OUTside specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is greater than the high
limit or less than the low limit specified. The high and low limits are specified with the
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands
respectively.
Argument 2: WIThin specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is within the high and low
limits. The high and low limits are specified with the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN?
returns either OUTSIDE or WITHIN, indicating the conditions for generating a pulse trigger.
500
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
Description: Sets or queries the type of main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Type in the
Trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | LOGIc | PULse | COMMunication (TDS 500D & 700D)|
VIDeo }
(Only the TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D use the LOGIc and PULse arguments. Only the TDS
500D and 700D use the COMMunication argument. Only oscilloscopes with option 05 use the
VIDeo argument.)
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | LOGIc | PULse | COMMunication (TDS 500D & 700D)|
VIDeo }?
Argument 1: EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE
commands.
Argument 2: LOGIc (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D only) specifies that a trigger occurs when
specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc commands.
Argument 3: PULse (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a
specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse commands.
Argument 4: COMMunication (TDS 500D & 700D only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a
specified signal is found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication commands.
Argument 5: VIDeo (option 05 only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is
found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo commands.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE?
might return PULSE indicating that the main trigger type is a pulse trigger.
501
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
(Option 05) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main video trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?
might return:
NTS;CH1;NEGA;NUMER;2;1;COLO;COLO;787;59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;15.89E-6
as the current main video trigger parameters.
502
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger delay mode. This is equivalent to using the Video
TV Delay Mode side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY { TIMe | LINES | LINE }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY?
Argument 1: TIMe specifies a delay by time.
Argument 2: LINES specifies a delay by a number of video lines. For the TDS 400A, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives this argument, it
will convert it to LINE. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in response to a query.
Argument 3: LINE specifies a delay by a number of video lines.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY TIME
specifies a delay by time.
503
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD
(Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. For the TDS 400A, this is
equivalent to using the Video Scan side menu when Class is NOT set to Custom.
For the TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D, this is equivalent to pressing Field in the video main
menu, Field in the side menu, and entering a value with the keypad or general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1 (TDS 400A): TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD { ODD | EVEN | ALL | FIELD1 | FIELD2 |
FIELDEither }
Syntax 2 (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D): TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD <NR1>
Syntax 3 (TDS 400A): TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD?
Argument 1(TDS 400A): ODD specifies interlaced video field 1.
Argument 2(TDS 400A): EVEN specifies interlaced video field 2.
Argument 3(TDS 400A): All specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2.
Argument 4(TDS 400A): FIELD1 specifies interlaced video field 1. For the TDS 400A, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives this argument, it
will convert it to ODD. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in response to a query.
Argument 5(TDS 400A): FIELD2 specifies interlaced video field 2. For the TDS 400A, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives this argument, it
will convert it to EVEN. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in response to a query.
Argument 6(TDS 400A): FIELDEither specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2. For
the TDS 400A, this argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A
receives this argument, it will convert it to ALL. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in
response to a query.
Argument 7 (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D): <NR1> specifies the video (color) field. For
example, 1 specifies interlaced video field one and 2 specifies interlaced video field two.
PAL signals have 1 to 8 fields, HDTV signals have 1 or 2, and FlexFormat supports 1 or 2.
Example 1 (TDS 400A): TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD FIELD1 selects odd fields.
Example 2 (TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D):
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD 1 selects field 1.
504
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to pressing
Field in the video main menu and then Field, Odd, Even or All in the side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType { NUMERic | ALL | EVEN | ODD }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType?
Argument 1: NUMERic specifies a selected line in the selected field. If you send this command
when the mode is MONO or SECAM, the oscilloscope will generate an SRQ.
Argument 2: ALL specifies a selected line in all fields.
Argument 3: EVEN specifies a selected line in even fields.
Argument 4: ODD specifies a selected line in odd fields.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE ALL selects a selected line in all fields.
505
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the main flexible-format video trigger parameters.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?
might return:
59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E-6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;15.89E-6
as the flexible-format video trigger parameters.
506
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the flexible-format video frames per second (e.g. 59.94 frames per
second for 1050 and 50 for 1250). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu
(with FlexFmt as the Standard), Field Rate from the side menu, and entering a value with
the keypad or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDrate { <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDrate?
Argument: <NR3> the field rate.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELDRATE?
returns the specified field rate.
507
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the flexible-format video fields. This is equivalent to pressing Setup
from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Fields from the side menu, and
entering the value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS?
Argument: <NR1> the number of fields in the standard.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXformat:FIELDS?
returns the number of fields in the format.
508
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the flexible-format video lines in a frame. This is equivalent to
pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Lines from the side
menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES { <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES?
Argument: <NR3> the frame lines.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES?
returns the specified number of lines.
509
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSynchwidth
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the flexible-format negative sync width. The HDTV horizontal sync is
a tri-level sync. The first of the two consecutive sync pulses used is negative and the second is
positive. The positive sync pulse starts on the rising edge of the negative sync. The two pulses
have the same width such that specifying the negative pulse is only required. Setting the width is
equivalent to pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Sync
Width from the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth?
Argument: <NR3> the negative sync width.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:NEGSYNCWIDTH?
returns the specified flexible-format negative sync width.
510
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last line
in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (negative) of the first negative vertical sync pulse. This
is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard),
pressing V1 Start Time in the side menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general
purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime?
Argument: <NR3> the v1 starttime.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1STARTTIME?
returns the specified HDTV v1starttime.
511
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the first negative
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt
as the Standard), pressing V1 Stop Time in the side menu, and entering a value with the keypad
or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime?
Argument: <NR3> the v1 stoptime.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1STOPTIME?
returns the specified v1stoptime.
512
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last line
in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (positive) of the second vertical sync pulse. Note: the
second pulse may be a negative pulse or the negative portion of a tri-sync pulse that is within the
last line (usually located at the 1/2 line point). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video
main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing V2 Start Time in the side menu, and
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime?
Argument: <NR3> the v2 starttime.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STARTTIME?
returns the specified v2 starttime.
513
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the second negative
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt
as the Standard), pressing V2 Stop Time in the side menu, and entering a value with the keypad
or the general purpose knob.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime?
Argument: <NR3> the v2 stoptime.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STOPTIME?
returns the specified v2 stoptime.
514
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the high definition TV frame rate. This is equivalent to toggling
HDTV from the Video main-menu Standard pop-up, pressing Format, and then selecting a frame
rate from the side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv?
Argument: <NR1> specifies the frame rate. More precisely, 787 selects a 787/59.94/2:1 format.
1050 selects a 1050/59.94/2:1 format. 1125 selects a 1125/60/2:1 format. 1250 selects a
1250/50/2:1 format.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV 787
specifies 787/59.94/2:1 format.
515
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff?
(TDS 400A) (Option 05) (Query Only)
Description: Returns the video trigger holdoff value.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff?
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE 0.
516
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting Holdoff
in the Mode & Holdoff side menu of the video trigger menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue?
Argument: <NR1> is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 10
set the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.
517
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger interlace format. This is equivalent to setting
Interlace in the Scan Rate and Interlace main menu of the video trigger menu when Class is set
to Custom.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1:
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce { FIELD1 | FIELD2 | FIELDEither | OFF }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIN:VIDeo:INTERLAce?
518
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
(Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger in terms of a number of lines. This is equivalent to
pressing the Line (TV Delay Mode in the TDS 400A) item in the video main menu, pressing Line
in the side menu (if needed), and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.
The minimum line number is the starting line in the field. For PAL, field 1 (odd fields in the TDS
400A) has line 2 (1 in the TDS 400A) as the minimum, and field 2 (even fields in the TDS 400A)
has line 315 (314 in the TDS 400A).
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE?
Argument: <NR1> specifies a number of lines to delay by.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE 5
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.
519
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger delay in terms of a number of lines. This is
equivalent to entering data in the Line item in the Video TV Delay Mode side menu. This
command is available for backwards compatibility.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES { NR3 }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES?
Argument: <NR3> specifies a number of lines to delay by.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES 5
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.
520
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the NTSC mode selection. This is equivalent to choosing 525/NTSC
in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and a side menu item (NTSC or Mono).
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc { MONo | COLOr }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc?
Argument 1: MONo specifies mode for non-color signals.
Argument 2: COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC MONO
specifies numeric fields are invalid.
521
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the PAL video trigger mode selection. This is equivalent to toggling
625/PAL in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and a side menu item (PAL,
Mono, or SECAM).
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL { MONo | COLOr | SECAm }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL?
Argument 1: MONo specifies mode for noncolor signals.
Argument 2: COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.
Argument 3: SECAm specifies mode for SECAM signals.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL MONO
specifies non-color PAL signals.
522
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger scan parameters. This is equivalent to using the
Video Scan Parameters side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN { RATE1 | RATE2 | RATE3 | RATE4 }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN?
Argument 1: RATE1 specifies a 15 to 20 kHz video line rate.
Argument 2: RATE2 specifies a 20 to 25 kHz video line rate.
Argument 3: RATE3 specifies a 25 to 35 kHz video line rate.
Argument 4: RATE4 specifies a 35 to 64 kHz video line rate.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN RATE1
selects rate 1.
523
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger scan period.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod <NR3>
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod?
524
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
(Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the source for the main video trigger. This is equivalent to selecting
Source in the video main menu and a desired channel from the side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce { CH<x> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Argument:
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4; or CH1, CH2, AUX1, or
AUX2 on the TDS 520D, 620B, 680B, & 724D).
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1
selects channel 1 as the source for the main video trigger.
525
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard
(TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger standard. This is equivalent to selecting the
standard in the video Standard pop-up (525/NTSC, 625/PAL, HDTV, or FlexFmt).
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard { NTSC | PAL | HDTv | FLEXformat}
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard?
Argument 1: NTSC specifies the NTSC 525/59.94/2:1 standard.
Argument 2: PAL specifies the PAL 625/59.94/2:1 standard.
Argument 3: HDTv allows selection of the following HDTV formats:
787/59.94/1:1, 1050/59.94/2:1, 1050/59.94/2:1, 1125/60/2:1, 1250/50/2:1.
Argument 4: FLEXformat allows the user to specify the video parameters. The default table is
1050/59.94/2:1.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC
selects the NTSC video format.
526
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc
(Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger sync polarity. This is equivalent to selecting Sync
Polarity from the video main menu and a side-menu item (Neg Sync or Pos Sync).
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc { POSITIVe | NEGAtive }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc?
Argument 1: POSITIVe specifies a positive going voltage.
Argument 2: NEGAtive specifies a negative going voltage.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC POSITIVE
selects a positive going voltage for the desired synchronization pulse.
527
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger class. This is equivalent to selecting the class in the
Video Class side menu of the Video menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem { NTSc | PAL | SECAM | CUSTom }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem?
Argument 1: NTSc selects a condition that adheres to the National Television System Committee
standards. Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a frame rate of 30 Hz.
Argument 2: PAL selects a condition that adheres to the Phase Alternate Line standard.
Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a frame rate of 25 Hz.
Argument 3: SECAM selects a condition that adheres to the SECAM standard.
Argument 4: CUSTom selects a condition that adheres to the frequency range of the video signal
as you have defined them from the available ranges.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:SYSTEM NTSC
selects triggering to occur on an NTSC compatible signal.
528
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe
(TDS 400A) (Option 05)
Description: Sets or queries the video trigger delay time. This is equivalent to entering the time in
the Delay by Time item of the Video TV Delay Mode side menu.
Group: Trigger
Syntax 1: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe { <NR3> }
Syntax 2: TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe?
Argument: <NR3> specifies a delay time.
Example: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME 5E-6
selects 5 us for the desired delay time.
529
TRIGger STATE?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the current state of the triggering system.
Group: Trigger
Syntax: TRIGger:STATE?
Return Value 1: ARMed
indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information. All triggers are ignored when
TRIGger:STATE is ARMING.
Return Value 2: AUTO
indicates that the oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger.
Return Value 3: FASTframe (TDS 500D and 700D)
indicates that the instrument is in FastFrame mode. This means normal trigger status monitoring
is turned off. The oscilloscope will not return armed, partial, ready, trigger, or auto while in this
state.
Return Value 4: INStavu (TDS 500D and 700D)
indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode.
Return Value 5: PARTial
indicates that the main trigger has occurred and the oscilloscope is waiting for trigger(s) for the
delay by events.
Return Value 6: REAdy
indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and the oscilloscope is ready to accept
a trigger.
Return Value 7: SAVe
indicates that the oscilloscope is in save mode and is not acquiring data.
Return Value 8: TRIGger
indicates that the oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is acquiring the posttrigger information.
Example: TRIGGER:STATE?
might return ARMED, indicating that pretrigger data is being acquired.
530
*TRG
(No Query Form)
Description: (Trigger) executes commands that are defined by *DDT.
The Group Execute Trigger (GET) interface message has the same effect as the *TRG
command.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: Alias commands, *DDT
Syntax: *TRG
Example: *TRG
immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.
531
*TST?
(Query Only)
Description: (Self-Test) Tests the GPIB interface and returns a 0.
Group: Miscellaneous
Syntax: *TST?
Return Value: <NR1> and is always 0.
532
UNLock
(No Query Form)
Description: Unlocks the front panel. This command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.
NOTE: If the oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLOCk command
has no effect. For more information see the ANSI-IEEE Std. 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface
for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Command: LOCk
Syntax: UNLock ALL
Argument: ALL specifies all front-panel buttons and knobs.
533
VERBose
Description: Sets and queries the Verbose State that controls the length of keywords on query
responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. This command does not affect IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk).
Group: Miscellaneous
Related Commands: HEADer, *LRN, SET?
Syntax 1: VERBose { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: VERBose?
Argument 1: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 sets the Verbose State true, which returns full-length
keywords for applicable setting queries.
Argument 2: OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Verbose State false, which returns minimum-length
keywords for applicable setting queries.
Example 1: VERBOSE ON
sets the Verbose State true.
Example 2: VERBOSE?
might return the value 1, showing that the Verbose State is true.
534
*WAI
(No Query Form)
Description: (Wait) Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until
all pending operations finish. This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the
oscilloscope with your application program. For more information, refer to the section on
synchronization methods.
Group: Status and Error
Related Commands: BUSY?, *OPC
Syntax: *WAI
535
WAVFrm?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns WFMPre? and CURVe? data for the waveform or waveforms as specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to sending WFMPre? and CURVe?.
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field will contain 50
clks/div.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMPre?
Syntax: WAVFrm?
536
WFMPre?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the waveform formatting data for the first ordered waveform as specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. The channel and math waveforms selected by the DATa:SOUrce
command must be displayed.
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field will contain 50
clks/div.
Group: Waveform
Related Command: WAVFrm?
Syntax: WFMPre?
Return Value: The format of the response is:
BYT_Nr <NR1>;BIT_Nr <NR1>;ENCdg { ASC | BIN };BN_Fmt { RI | RP };BYT_Or { LSB | MSB };
<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };XUNit <QString>;XINcr
<NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro<NR3>[;<wfm>:WFID
<Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT{ ENV | Y };XUNit<QString>;XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off
<NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>...]
537
WFMPre:BIT_Nr
Description: Returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the first ordered waveform
as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The WFMPre:BIT_Nr command is ignored on input.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Syntax 1: WFMPre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:BIT_Nr?
Argument: <NR1> is either 8 or 16, and is equivalent to WFMPre:BYT_Nr * 8.
Example: WFMPRE:BIT_NR?
might return 8, indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform point.
538
WFMPre:BN_Fmt
Description: Sets or queries the format of binary data for the first ordered waveform as specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:ENCdg
Syntax 1: WFMPre:BN_Fmt { RI | RP }
Syntax 2: WFMPre:BN_Fmt?
Argument 1: RI specifies signed integer data-point representation.
Argument 2: RP specifies positive integer data-point representation.
Example 1: WFMPRE:BN_FMT RP
specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer data-points.
Example 2: WFMPRE:BN_FMT?
returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format.
539
WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Description: Sets or queries the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform as specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to the DATa:WIDth command.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BIT_Nr
Syntax 1: WFMPre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:BYT_Nr?
Argument: <NR1> is the number of bytes per point and can be 1 or 2.
Example: WFMPRE:BYT_NR 2
specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point.
540
WFMPre:BYT_Or
Description: Selects which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform
data transfer when DATa:WIDth (or WFMPre:BYT_Nr) is set to 2.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, WFMPre:ENCdg
Syntax 1: WFMPre:BYT_Or { LSB | MSB }
Syntax 2: WFMPre:BYT_Or?
Argument 1: LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first.
Argument 2: MSB selects the most significant byte to be transmitted first.
Example 1: WFMPRE:BYT_OR MSB
specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform data will be transferred first.
Example 2: WFMPRE:BYT_OR?
returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte is transferred first.
541
WFMPre:ENCdg
Description: Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred with the CURVe
command.
Group: Waveform
Related Commands: DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:BN_Fmt
Syntax 1: WFMPre:ENCdg { ASC | BIN }
Syntax 2: WFMPre:ENCdg?
Argument 1: ASC specifies ASCII curve data.
Argument 2: BIN specifies binary curve data.
Example 1: WFMPRE:ENCDG ASC
specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format.
Example 2: WFMPRE:ENCDG?
might return BIN, indicating that the waveform data is in binary format.
542
WFMPre:PT_Fmt
(No Query Form)
Description: Selects the point format of the waveform data for the first ordered waveform as
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:PT_Fmt { ENV | Y }
Argument 1: ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
X(n) = 0 + XINcr (n - PT_Off)
Y(n(max) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n(max)) - YOFf)
Y(n(min)) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n(min)) - YOFf)
Argument 2: Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted
for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute
coordinates are given by:
X(n) = 0 + XINcr (n - PT_Off)
Y(n) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n) - YOFf)
Example: WFMPRE:PT_Fmt ENV
sets the waveform data point format to enveloped.
543
WFMPre:PT_Off
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies the trigger point within the waveform record for the reference waveform
specified by the DATa:DESTination command.
Group: Waveform
Related Command: HORizontal:TRIGger:POsition
Syntax: WFMPre:PT_Off <NR1>
Argument: <NR1> = 0 to the record length, and is the position of the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt.
Example: WFMPRE:PT_OFF 1
specifies that the trigger point is the first point in the waveform record.
544
WFMPre:XINcr
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies the horizontal sampling interval for the reference waveform specified by
the DATa:DESTination command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:XINcr <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the sampling interval in seconds per point.
545
WFMPre:YMUlt
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies the vertical scale factor for the reference waveform specified by the
DATa:DESTination command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:YMUlt <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the vertical scale factor in YUNits (usually volts) per division.
546
WFMPre:YOFf
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies the offset of the vertical component for the reference waveform specified
by the DATa:DESTination command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:YOFf <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.
547
WFMPre:YZEro
(No Query Form)
Description: Specifies the offset voltage for the reference waveform specified by the
DATa:DESTination command.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:YZEro <NR3>
Argument: <NR3> is of the offset in YUNits (usually volts).
Table 2-32 lists additional WFMPre commands that are included for compatibility purposes.
NOTE: These commands do not support a query form and all information is ignored.
Table 2-32: Additional WFMPre Commands
========================================================
Command
Argument
Description
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------WFMPre:CRVchk {CHKSM0|NONe} Binary curve error check
WFMPre:NR_PT
<NR1>
Number of waveform points
WFMPre:WFId
<QString>
Waveform identifier
WFMPre:XUNit
<QString>
Horizontal units
WFMPre:XMUlt
<NR3>
Horizontal (X-axis) scale factor
WFMPre:XOFf
<NR3>
Horizontal (X-axis) offset
WFMPre:XZEro
<NR3>
Horizontal (X-axis) origin offset
WFMPre:YUNit
<QString>
Vertical units
WFMPre:ZMUlt
<NR3
Z-axis scale factor
WFMPre:ZOFf
<NR3>
Z-axis offset
WFMPre:ZUNit
<QString>
Z-axis units
WFMPre:ZZEro
<NR3>
Z-axis origin offset
========================================================
NOTE: When returning WFMPRE:<wfm> information from the oscilloscope, <wfm> specifies the
waveform source (CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>). The source must also be set using the
DAta:SOUrce command. When sending WFMPRE:<wfm> information to the scope, the <wfm>
specification is ignored and the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination is used
instead.
548
WFMPre:<wfm>?
(Query Only)
Description: Returns the waveform formatting data for first ordered waveform as specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. Channel and math waveforms must be displayed before they can be
queried. Querying an invalid reference waveform generates an execution error.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it will return the acquisition record information as opposed to
the waveform record information.
Group: Waveform
Syntax: WFMPre:<wfm>?
Return Value: The format of the response is:
<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };XUNit <QString>;XINcr
<NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>;YOFf <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>
[;<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };XUNit <QString>;XINcr
<NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>;YOFf <NR3>;YYZEro <NR3>...
549
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt
Description: Sets or queries the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record.
This value is ignored on input.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it will return the acquisition record information as opposed to
the waveform record information.
Related Command: DATa:DESTination
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt <NR1>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?
Argument: <NR1> is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is 2 then there are twice as many
bytes.
<NR1> = 0 means that the waveform record is of an unspecified length.
Example: WFMPRE:CH1:NR_Pt?
might return 5000 as the number of data points in the waveform record transferred from channel
1.
550
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt
Description: Selects the data point format for the first ordered waveform as selected by the
DATa:SOUrce command. On input <wfm> always defaults to the reference location specified by
DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Related Command: DATa:DESTination
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt { ENV | Y }
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt?
Argument 1: ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted as minimum and maximum point
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
...
X(n) = 0 + XINcr (n - PT_Off)
Y(n(min) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n(min)) - YOFf)
Y(n(max)) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n(max)) - YOFf)
....
Argument 2: Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted
for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute
coordinates are given by:
X(n) = 0 + XINcr (n - PT_Off)
Y(n) = YZEro + YMUlt (y(n) - YOFf)
Example: WFMPRE:MATH1:PT_FMT?
might return ENV, indicating that the MATH1 waveform data format is enveloped.
551
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off
Description: Returns the trigger point within the waveform record. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off <NR1>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off?
Argument: <NR1> = 0 to the recordlength, and is the position of the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt when queried.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> refers to the acquisition length.
Example: WFMPRE:CH1:PT_OFF?
returns 0 indicating the trigger position within the waveform record.
552
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId
Description: Returns information about the waveform such as input coupling, volts per division,
time per division, acquisition mode, and record length.
The WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId command is ignored on input.
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field will contain "50
clks/div".
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId <QString>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId?
Argument: <QString> is the waveform identifier string.
553
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr
Description: Sets or queries the horizontal sampling interval. On input <wfm> always defaults to
the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field will contain "50
clks/div".
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr <NR3>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr?
Argument: <NR3> is the sampling interval.
554
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit
Description: Returns the horizontal (X-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of creation.
The WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit command is ignored on input.
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field will contain "50
clks/div".
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit <QString>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit?
Argument: <QString> is "s" for seconds and specifies the units.
Example: WFMPRE:CH1:XUNIT?
might return "s", indicating that the horizontal units for channel 1 are seconds.
555
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro
(TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Sets or queries the horizontal (X-axis) origin offset. On input <wfm> always defaults
to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro?
Argument: <NR3> is the offset in XUNits (usually time).
556
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt
Description: Sets or queries the vertical scale factor, in YUNit per unscaled data point value. On
input <wfm> always defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless
of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt <NR3>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt?
Argument: <NR3> is the scale factor, in YUNits (usually volts), per digitizing level.
557
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf
Description: Sets or queries the vertical position of the waveform. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf <NR3>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf?
Argument: <NR3> is the position in digitizing levels.
558
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit
Description: Returns the vertical (Y-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of creation. The
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit command is ignored on input.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit <QString>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit?
Argument: <QString> is "V" for volts or "VV" for volts**2, and specifies the units.
Example: WFMPRE:CH2:YUNIT?
might return "V", meaning that the units for the vertical component of the channel 2 waveform
data are volts.
559
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
Description: Sets or queries the vertical (Y-axis) offset voltage. On input <wfm> always defaults
to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.
Group: Waveform
Syntax 1: WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2: WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro?
Argument: <NR3> is the offset in YUNits (usually volts).
560
ZOOm
Description: Resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces. The
ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reset All Factors or Reset Live Factors in the TDS 400A,
500D, 600B, or 700D Zoom Reset menu or selecting Reset Zoom Factors in the Zoom menu of
the TDS 510A.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm { RESET | RESETLive (TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) }
Syntax 2: ZOOm?
Argument: RESET resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces.
Argument: RESet (TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D) resets the zoom transforms to default
values for all live traces.
Example: ZOOM?
might return
:ZOOM:STATE 0;HORIZONTAL:SCALE 1.00E+0;POSITION 500.0E-3;LOCK
LIVE;:ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0E+0;POSITION 0.0E+0.
561
ZOOm:DUAl
(TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Turns Dual Zoom mode on and off
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm DUAl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
Syntax 2: ZOOm:DUAl?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns Dual Zoom mode off.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns Dual Zoom mode on.
Example 1: ZOOM:DUAL ON enables the Dual Zoom features.
Example 2: ZOOM:DUAL? returns either 0 or 1 depending on the state of the Dual Zoom mode.
562
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet
(TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Adjusts the requested horizontal offset between the centers of the main and second
zoom boxes.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm DUAl:OFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2: ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet?
Argument: <NR3> is the offset time in seconds.
Example: ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET 100.0E-6
adjusts the offset time in seconds between the centers of the main and second zoom boxes.
563
ZOOm:GRAticule
(TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D)
Description: Selects between the upper and lower graticule for use by the zoom preview state. If
you select the lower graticule, horizontal and vertical knob changes will affect the underlying
acquisition system. If you select the upper graticule, horizontal and vertical knob changes will
affect the zoom factors.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm GRAticule { LOWEr | UPPer }
Syntax 2: ZOOm:GRAticule?
Argument 1: LOWEr selects the lower graticule.
Argument 2: UPPer selects the upper graticule.
Example: ZOOM:GRATICULE?
might return UPPER, indicating that the upper graticule is selected.
564
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
Description: Specifies the waveforms that the horizontal zoom parameters affect. This is
equivalent to setting Horizontal Lock in the Zoom side menu.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk { ALL | LIVe | NONe }
Syntax 2: ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk?
Argument 1: LIVe specifies that all live (CH<x>) waveforms will be horizontally positioned and
scaled together.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, LIVe is the only valid argument.
Argument 2: NONe specifies that only the selected waveform is positioned and scaled using the
horizontal zoom parameters.
Argument 3: ALL specifies that all (CH<x>, Ref<x>, Math<x>) waveforms will be horizontally
positioned and scaled together.
Example 1: ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK LIVE
specifies that all live waveforms are positioned and scaled together.
Example 2: ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK?
returns either LOCK or NONE.
565
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition
Description: Sets or queries the horizontal position of zoomed waveforms. The setting of the
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk command determines the waveforms affected. For example, if
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk is set to LIVe then only live (as opposed to reference and math)
waveforms are affected.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, sets or queries the horizontal position of the zoomed
acquisition record.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2: ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition?
Argument: <NR3> is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform that is to the left of the
graticule.
Example: ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50
centers the waveform on the display.
566
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle
Description: Sets or queries the horizontal expansion factor. This command is equivalent to
using the front-panel Horizontal Scale knob when Zoom is on. It is also equivalent to using Zoom
Preview with the upper graticule selected in the TDS 500D, 600B, or 700D.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle?
Argument: <NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction.
It is less than 1 if there is horizontal compression.
It is more than 1 if there is horizontal expansion.
Example: ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE?
might return 1.00E+0 as the horizontal scale factor.
567
ZOOm:STATE
Description: Turns Zoom mode on and off. When Zoom mode is on, the horizontal and vertical
position and scale commands affect the waveform display, not the acquisition. This is the only
way to position and scale math and reference waveforms. This command is equivalent to turning
Zoom on and off in the Zoom side menu.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm:STATE { <NR1> | OFF | ON | PREView (not on TDS 510A) }
Syntax 2: ZOOm:STATE?
Argument 1: OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns Zoom mode off.
Argument 2: ON or <NR1> NOT = 0 turns Zoom mode on. When DPO mode is in use, the state
value becomes a requested value, to be restored when DPO mode is switched off. Do not use this
condition if DPO mode is on. DPO mode overrides the zoom on state.
Argument 3: PREView (not on TDS 510A) sets ZOOM:STATE to preview. Also, it causes the
oscilloscope to display both the ZOOM:STATE OFF and ZOOM:STATE ON traces simultaneously
in dual, half-height graticules. Do not use this condition if DPO mode is on. DPO mode overrides
the zoom preview state.
In extended-acquisition-length mode, entering the zoom preview state causes fit-to-screen to be
on. If the oscilloscope exits the extended-acquisition-length mode or the zoom preview state, the
fit-to-screen mode returns back to its prior setting.
Example 1: ZOOM:STATE ON
enables the Zoom feature.
Example 2: ZOOM:STATE?
returns either OFF, PREVIEW, or ON depending on the state of Zoom mode.
568
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition
Description: Sets or queries the vertical position of waveforms.
Group: Zoom
Syntax 1: ZOOm:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2: ZOOm:VERTical:POSition?
Argument: <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions.
Example: ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION?
might return :ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION 0
569
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle
Description: Sets or queries the vertical expansion and compression factor.
Group: Zoom
Related Commands: ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1: ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2: ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument: <NR3> is the amount of vertical expansion or compression.
Example: ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE?
might return :ZOOM::VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0E+0
570
Example Programs
The example programs illustrate methods you can use to control the oscilloscope from the GPIB
interface. The diskettes that contain with this help file also contain listings for these programs
written in Microsoft QuickBASIC 4.5 and Microsoft QuickC 2.5.
The programs run on a PC compatible system equipped with a Tektronix (National Instruments)
GPIB board and associated drivers. For example, the programs will work with a Tektronix
S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB package.
All the example programs assume that the GPIB system recognizes the oscilloscope as DEV1
and the PC (controller) as GPIB0. You can use the IBCONF.EXE program to assign these names.
Example Software Overview
Compiling the Example Software
Compiling and Linking QuickC Programs
Compiling and Linking QuickBASIC Programs
571
Example Software Overview
The example software includes:
•
•
•
•
•
MEAS: automatically measures waveform parameters.
COMM: shows communication between controller and oscilloscope.
GETWFM: reads a waveform from an oscilloscope and stores it in a file.
CURSOR: uses cursors to measure waveform parameters.
TL: a talker-listener program.
572
Compiling the Example Software
The example programs diskette contains programs written in Microsoft QuickBASIC 4.5 and
Microsoft QuickC 2.5.
Executable versions of the programs are in the PROGRAMS directory. Source versions are in the
SOURCES directory. Within this directory, the QuickBASIC programs are in the Q-BASIC
subdirectory and the QuickC programs are in the QUICK-C subdirectory.
A README file in each directory explains how to build executable code from the source files
provided.
The QuickC directory also comes with sample MAKE files and sample executable files. These
have the suffix .MAK.
If you wish to develop code, you will need to use files that come with the GPIB system.
Specifically, the QuickBASIC programs use QBDECL.BAS and QBIB.OBJ. The QuickC programs
use DECL.H and MCIB.OBJ.
NOTE: The programs you compile in the Sources directory work with the Tektronix S3FG210
(National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB system. It may take extra steps or changes to get
them to work with older Tektronix GURU and other GPIB systems.
573
Compiling and Linking QuickC Programs
To make an executable for any example, perform the following:
1. Install QuickC. Select the SMALL memory model. Be sure to set up your path so DOS can
access the QuickC directory.
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB board and drivers.
Remember to identify the GPIB device as DEV1. You can use the IBCONF.EXE program to
do this.
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also create a special
directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is hard disk C, you want to store the
examples in drive C, and the examples diskette is in drive B, you might type:
mkdir examples
cd examples
copy B:\quick-c\*.* .
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy DECL.H and MCIB.OBJ from your Tektronix
S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB drivers directory to this directory. For
example, if the GPIB drivers are in the gpib-pc directory and you are in the example programs
directory, you would type:
copy \gpib-pc\decl.h .
copy \gpib-pc\mcib.obj .
5. To compile and link your TDS sample C programs, simply type:
nmake <file name>.mak
where <file name> refers to the name of the example program you wish to compile and
link. Specifically:
To compile and link MEAS.C, type: nmake meas.mak
To compile and link COMM.C, type: nmake comm.mak
To compile and link GETWFM.C, type: nmake getwfm.mak
To compile and link CURSOR.C, type: nmake cursor.mak
To compile and link TL.C, type: nmake tl.mak
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.
To run meas, type: meas
To run comm, type: comm
To run getwfm, type: getwfm
To run cursor, type: cursor
574
To run tl, type: tl
575
Compiling and Linking QuickBASIC Programs
To make an executable for any of the following files, perform the following:
1. Install QuickBASIC.
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB board and drivers.
Remember to reboot your PC to initialize the GPIB drivers.
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also create a special
directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is hard disk C, you want to store the
examples in drive C, and the examples diskette is in drive B, you might type:
mkdir examples
cd examples
copy b:\q-basic\*.* .
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy QBDECL.BAS and QBIB.OBJ from your
Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB drivers directory to the
directory your example programs are in. For example, if the GPIB drivers are in the gpib-pc
directory and you are in the example programs directory, you would type:
copy \gpib-pc\qbdecl.bas .
copy \gpib-pc\qbib.obj .
5. Perform the following two steps for example programs:
a. Compile the program by using the following command:
bc /o <file>.bas;
where <file> is one of the example program names.
To compile MEAS.BAS, type: bc /o meas.bas;
To compile COMM.BAS, type: bc /o comm.bas;
To compile GETWFM.BAS, type: bc /o getwfm.bas;
To compile CURSOR.BAS, type: bc /o cursor.bas;
To compile TL.BAS, type: bc /o tl.bas;
b. Link the compiled program with the qbib.obj module to create the executable program
(file.EXE) by using the following command:
link <file>.obj+qbib.obj;
where <file> is one of the above program names.
To link MEAS.OBJ, type: link meas.obj+qbib.obj;
To link COMM.OBJ, type: link comm.obj+qbib.obj;
576
To link GETWFM.OBJ, type: link getwfm.obj+qbib.obj;
To link CURSOR.OBJ, type: link cursor.obj+qbib.obj;
To link TL.OBJ, type: link tl.obj+qbib.obj;
GPIBIO.BAS is a collection of input/output routines used by the other programs and is
included for proper file compilation.
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.
To run meas, type: meas
To run comm, type: comm
To run getwfm, type: getwfm
To run cursor, type: cursor
To run tl, type: tl
NOTE: The example programs disable front-panel operation while they are running and reenable
it when they terminate. If your program terminates prematurely, front-panel operation may remain
disabled. To reenable front-panel operation, do one of the following: cycle power on the
oscilloscope or send the GPIB command UNLOCK ALL to unlock the front panel. You can send
the UNLOCK ALL command with the TL program included in your sample programs disk.
Status and Events
The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB interface. This
system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope.
The oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers and two queues. This
section describes these registers and components. It also explains how the event handling system
operates.
Registers
Queues
Event Handling Sequence
Messages
Synchronization Methods
577
Registers
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
•
Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope. They include the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR).
•
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status
Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER).
Status Registers
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR) record certain
types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use. IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines
these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an execution error or
service request. When an event of a given type occurs, the oscilloscope sets the bit that
represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can disable bits so that they ignore events
and remain at zero. See the Enable Registers section on a following screen.) Reading the status
registers tells you what types of events have occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) - The SESR, shown in Figure 3-1, records eight
types of events that can occur within the oscilloscope. Use the *ESR? query to read the SESR
register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate
information about new events.
Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
_____________________________________________________
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON
URQ CME EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC OPC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions
=======================================================
Bit
Function
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PON (Power On).
7 (MSB)
Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on. The completion of the
diagnostic tests also sets this bit.
URQ (User Request).
6
Shows that an Application menu button was pressed.
CME (Command Error).
5
Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command
or query. Command error messages are listed in Table 3-4 below.
EXE (Execution Error).
4
Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was executing a
command or query. Execution error messages are listed in Table 3-5 below.
DDE (Device Error).
3
Shows that a device error occurred. Device error messages are listed in
Table 3-6 below.
QYE (Query Error).
2
578
Shows that either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no
data was present or pending, or that data in the Output Queue was lost.
RQC (Request Control).
1
Not used.
OPC (Operation Complete).
0 (LSB)
Shows that the operation is complete. This bit is set when all pending
operations complete following an *OPC command.
========================================================
The Status Byte Register (SBR) - shown in Figure 3-2, records whether output is available in the
Output Queue, whether the oscilloscope requests service, and whether the SESR has recorded
any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in the SBR are set
and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When
you use the *STB? query to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear
the bits.
Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)
____________________________________________________
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MAV _
_
_
_
_
RQS ESB
or
MSS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions
=====================================================
Bit
Function
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7 (MSB)
Not used.
6
RQS (Request Service),
obtained from a serial poll. Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from
the GPIB controller.
6
MSS (Master Status Summary),
obtained from *STB? query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5
ESB (Event Status Bit).
Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR.
4
MAV (Message Available).
Shows that output is available in the Output Queue.
3-0
Not used.
=======================================================
Enable Registers
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers
and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register (the DESER also
acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can prevent information from being recorded in the
register or queue.
579
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls. In order for
an event to be reported to its bit in the Status Register, the corresponding bit in the Enable
Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero, the event is not
recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and the commands
used to set them are described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) - is shown in Figure 3-3. This register
controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR, as described earlier.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the DESE? query to
read the DESER.
Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
____________________________________________________
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON
URQ CME EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC OPC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) - is shown in Figure 3-4. It controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE command to set
the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.
Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)
_____________________________________________________
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON
URQ CME EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC OPC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) - is shown in Figure 3-5. It controls which bits in
the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary (MSS)
bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read it. The RQS bit remains
set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes
back to a zero.
Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)
_____________________________________________________
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ESB
MAV ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Enable Registers and the *PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending *PSC 1 sets
the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
•
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
•
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
•
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
580
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in non-volatile memory through a
power cycle.
NOTE: To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send *PSC 0, use
the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER, and use the *SRE
command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent power-on cycles will generate a Service
Request.
581
Queues
The oscilloscope status and event reporting system contains two queues: the Output Queue and
the Event Queue.
The Output Queue
The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue. It empties this queue each time it
receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>. The controller must read a query
response before it sends the next command (or query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.
Warning. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query, the oscilloscope
normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit
in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of
the first response as well. To avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response
immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.
The Event Queue
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events. If more than 20 events stack up
in the Event Queue, the 20th event is replaced by event code 350, "Too many events."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event number), with the
EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text description of the event), or with the
ALLEV? query (which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event).
Reading an event removes it from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to read the
summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized by the *ESR? read
available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR? reads but not
read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are put in the Event Queue but are
not available until *ESR? is used again.
582
Messages
Tables 3-3 through 3-9 shown below list all the programming interface messages the oscilloscope
generates in response to commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives more detail about the
cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the message string,
and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is
controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message is associated with a specific
SESR bit. In the message tables that follow, the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title,
with exceptions noted with the error message text.
Table 3-3 given below shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report.
These have no associated SESR bit.
Table 3-3: No Event Messages
==========================================
Code
Message
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0
No events to report - queue empty
1
No events to report - new events pending *ESR?
Table 3-4 below shows the error messages generated by improper command syntax. Check that
the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax.
Table 3-4: Command Error Messages - CME Bit 5
=====================================
Code
Message
------------------------------------------------------------------100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
106
Invalid program data separator
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
111
Header separator error
112
Program mnemonic too long
113
Undefined header
118
Query not allowed
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in number
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
128
Numeric data not allowed
130
Suffix error
583
131
134
138
140
141
144
148
150
151
152
158
160
161
168
170
171
178
180
181
183
184
Invalid suffix
Suffix too long
Suffix not allowed
Character data error
Invalid character data
Character data too long
Character data not allowed
String data error
Invalid string data
String data too long
String data not allowed
Block data error
Invalid block data
Block data not allowed
Expression error
Invalid expression
Expression data not allowed
Alias error
Invalid outside alias definition
Invalid inside alias definition
Command in alias requires more/fewer parameters
Table 3-5 lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command. In these
error messages, you should read "macro" as "alias."
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages - EXE Bit 4
==================================================
Code
Message
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------200
Execution error
201
Invalid while in local
202
Settings lost due to rtl
210
Trigger error
211
Trigger ignored
212
Arm ignored
220
Parameter error
221
Settings conflict
222
Data out of range
223
Too much data
224
Illegal parameter value
230
Data corrupt or stale
240
Hardware error
241
Hardware missing
242
Hardware configuration error
243
Hardware I/O device error
250
Mass storage error
251
Missing mass storage
252
Missing media
253
Corrupt media
584
254
255
256
257
258
260
261
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
Media full
Directory full
File name not found
File name error
Media protected
Expression error
Math error in expression
Measurement error, Measurement system error
Measurement error, Zero period
Measurement error, No period found
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
Measurement error, Low signal amplitude
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
Measurement error, Invalid gate
Measurement error, Measurement overflow
Measurement error, Waveform does not cross Mid Ref
Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
Measurement error, No negative crossing
Measurement error, No positive crossing
Measurement error, No crossing
Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
Measurement error, Constant waveform
Measurement error, Unused
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm sample
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm cross
Measurement error, No valid edge - No trigger cross
Measurement error, No valid edge - No second cross
Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
Measurement error, WAIT calculating
Measurement error, No waveform to measure
Null Waveform
Positive and Negative Clipping
Measurement error, Positive Clipping
Measurement error, Negative Clipping
Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
Math error, Invalid math description
Math error, Reference waveform is invalid
Math error, Out of acquisition memory
Too many channels need to be acquired
EAL turned off (EAL = extended-acquisition-length mode)
Invalid password
Waveform request is invalid
Data start and stop > record length
Waveform requested is not a data source
Waveform requested is not turned on
585
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2258
2259
2260
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2285
2286
2290
2291
2292
2293
2301
2302
2311
Saveref error, Selected channel is turned off
Saveref error, Selected channel data invalid
Saveref error, Out of reference memory
Saveref error, Source reference data invalid
Reference deletion error, Waveform in use for math
Acq must be stopped
File too big
Calibration error
Alias error
Alias syntax error
Alias execution error
Illegal alias label
Alias parameter error
Alias definition too long
Alias expansion error
Alias redefinition not allowed
Alias header not found
Alias label too long
Alias table full
Wrong configuration
TekSecure (R) Pass
TekSecure (R) Fail
Limit error, Reference in use
Limit error, Reference data invalid
Limit error, Out of reference memory
Limit error, Selected channel is turned off
Cursor error, Off-screen
Cursor error, cursors in different frames
Group requested has not been selected or has been deleted
Table 3-6 below lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope operation. These errors
may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair.
Table 3-6: Device Error Messages - DDE Bit 3
==================================================
Code
Message
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------300
Device-specific error
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
313
Calibration memory lost
314
Save/recall memory lost
315
Configuration memory lost
350
Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)
586
Table 3-7 below lists the system event messages. These messages are generated whenever
certain system conditions occur.
Table 3-7: System Event Messages
==================================================
Code
Message
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
450
Right menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
451
Right menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
452
Right menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
453
Right menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
454
Right menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
460
Bottom menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
461
Bottom menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
462
Bottom menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
463
Bottom menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
464
Bottom menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
465
Bottom menu button #6 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
466
Bottom menu button #7 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
Table 3-8 below lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution.
These notify you that you may get unexpected results.
Table 3-8: Execution Warning Messages - EXE Bit 4
==================================================
Code
Message
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------500
Execution warning
510
String data too long, truncated
525
Parameter underrange
526
Parameter overrange
527
Parameter rounded
528
Parameter out of range
530
Data stop > stop. Values swapped internally
531
Data stop > record length, Curve truncated
532
Curve data too long, Curve truncated
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
587
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
570
571
572
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
Measurement warning, Low resolution
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
DPO mode is active - deactivate to see change
DPO mode is active - deactivate to use math
EAL on - turn off to see change (EAL = extended-acquisition-mode)
EAL on - turn off to use math (EAL = extended-acquisition-mode)
Saveref warning, decimated 500k waveform to 250k Ref (TDS 700D)
Option 05 not present
Option 2F not present
Table 3-9 below shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
oscilloscope.
Table 3-9: Internal Warning Messages
==================================================
Code
Message
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------600
Internal warning
620
Internal warning, Bad thermistor
630
Internal warning, 50 W overload
588
Event Handling Sequence
Figure 3-6, shown below, shows how to use the status and event handling system. In the
explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process
===================================================
{bmc PRJ.WMF}
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event is enabled in the
DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to
one, and the event is recorded in the Event Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also
enabled (3), then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled (6), the
MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated (7).
589
Synchronization Methods
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the
oscilloscope, some commands start a process that requires more time. For example, once a
HARDCOPY START command is executed it may be a few seconds before the hardcopy
operation is complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process, the oscilloscope
will continue processing other commands. This means that some operations will not be completed
in the order that they were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation. A first
operation must complete before the next one gets processed. The oscilloscope status and event
reporting system provides ways to do this.
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence waveform and then
taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could use the following command
sequence to do this:
/** Set up single-sequence acquisition **/
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/** Take amplitude measurement on acquired data **/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not finish before the
oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement (See Figure 3-7). This can result in an incorrect
amplitude value.
Figure 3-7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization
===========================================================
___________________
|ACQUIRE:STATE ON |
+-----------------+
_______________________________
|Acquiring Waveform Data
|
+------------------------------+
___________________________
|MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? |
+-------------------------+
|<------------------------------------------------------->|
Processing Time
590
===========================================================
To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on
the acquired data, you can synchronize the program. Figure 3-8 shows the desired processing
sequence.
Figure 3-8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization
===========================================================
___________________
|ACQUIRE:STATE ON |
+-----------------+_____________
|Acquiring |
|Waveform
|
|Data
|
+-----------+___________________________
|MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? |
+-------------------------+
|<------------------------------------------------------->|
Processing Time
===========================================================
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application
program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC, and *OPC?
.
Using the *WAI Command
You can force commands to execute sequentially by using the *WAI command. This command
forces completion of the previous commands before processing new ones.
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
591
Though *WAI is one of the easiest ways to achieve synchronization, it is also the most costly. The
processing time of the oscilloscope is slowed since it is processing a single command at a time.
This time could be spent doing other tasks.
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the oscilloscope, but the
commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until all operations in process are complete.
If the input buffer becomes full, the controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer.
This can cause a time-out.
Using the BUSY Query
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy processing a command
that has an extended processing time such as single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence using the BUSY? query for synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
While BUSY? keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI command. The
BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too many commands to the input
buffer. The controller is still tied up, though, and the repeated BUSY? query will result in more bus
traffic.
Using the *OPC Command
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the OPC bit in the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is complete. You achieve
synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) will
be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register will be enabled.
592
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with serial polling
looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement.
*/
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is complete, a Service Request
will be generated.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
593
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
*OPC
Program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The
SRQ, when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this
task.
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated
programming.
Using the *OPC? Query
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation is complete. A timeout could
occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
*OPC?
Wait for read from Output Queue.
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However, you must set the
controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.
594
Appendices
This section contains the following appendices:
Appendix A: Reserved Words
Appendix B: Interface Specifications
Appendix C: Factory Initialization Settings
595
Appendix A: Reserved Words
The following is a list of reserved words of the oscilloscope. Do not use these words for aliases.
Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling. Hint: Use the full spelling for the most robust
code as the minimum spelling rules may change over time and from model to model.
*CAL
*CLS
*DDT
*ESE
*ESR
*IDN
*LRN
*OPC
*PSC
*PUD
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB
*TRG
*TST
*WAI
ABOrt
ABSolute
AC
ACCept
ACQDAta
ACQDUration
ACQLength
ACQuire
ACQUISition
ACTivate
ACTUal
ALIas
ALL
ALLEv
ALLOcate
AMPlitude
AND
APPMenu
AREa
ARMed
ASC
ASCIi
AUTO
AUTOSet
AUXiliary
AVErage
BACKGround
BACKWards
BANdwidth
BASe
BAUd
BELl
596
BIN
BIT_Nr
BLAckman
BMP
BMPCOLOR
BN_Fmt
BOLd
BOTh
BOTTOM1
BOTTOM2
BOTTOM3
BOTTOM4
BOTTOM5
BOTTOM6
BOTTOM7
BOX
BOXPcnt
BURst
BUSY
BY
BYCONTents
BYT_Nr
BYT_Or
CALibrate
CATalog
CARea
CENtronics
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CHKsm0
CLAss
CLEar
CLEARMenu
CLEARSNapshot
CLEARSpool
CLOCk
CMEan
COLLision
COLOr
COMPARE
CONTRast
CONTROl
COPy
COUNt
COUPling
CPU
CRMs
CROSSHair
CRVchk
CURRent
CURSor
CURSOR1
CURSOR2
CURVe
597
CUSTom
CWD
DATa
DATE
DC
DEFAult
DEFINE
DELay
DELAYEd
DELEte
DELTa
DELTATime
DELWarn
DESE
DESKJet
DESTination
DIAg
DIR
DIREction
DISAbled
DISplay
DOTs
DPO
DPU411
DPU412
DUAl
ECL
EDGE
EDGE1
EDGE2
EITher
ENAbled
ENCdg
ENV
ENVElope
EPSColor
EPSCOLImg
EPSImage
EPSMono
EPSOn
EVEN
EVENT
EVENTS
EVENTSTime
EVMsg
EVQty
EXECute
EXTAtten
EXTDACQ
EXTDBatten
EXTINCTPCT
EXTINCTDB
FACtory
FALL
FALSe
FASTERthan
598
FASTframe
FFT
FIELD
FIELD1
FIELD2
FIELDEither
FIELDRATE
FIELDS
FIELDType
FIFtyFILEName
FILESystem
FILTer
FIRst
FITtoscreen
FLAg
FLEXformat
FORCe
FORMat
FORWards
FPAnel
FRAme
FREE
FREESpace
FREQuency
FULl
FUNCtion
GATing
GLItch
GND
GPIb
GRAticule
GRAYscale
GRId
HALt
HAMming
HARDCopy
HARDFlagging
HBArs
HDELTA
HDR
HDTv
HEADer
HERtz
HFRej
HIGH
HIGHLimit
HIRes
HIStogram
HISTOMASK
HITs
HOLdoff
HOLDTime
HORizontal
HPGl
HPOS1
HPOS2
599
HUNdred
ID
IMMed
IMPedance
INDependent
INFInite
INFPersist
INIT
INPut
INStavu
INTENSIFied
INTENSITy
INTERLAce
INTERLeaf
INVert
IRE
LABel
LANdscape
LASERJet
LAYout
LENgth
LESSLimit
LESSThan
LEVel
LFRej
LIMit
LINE
LINES
LINEAr
LIVe
LOCk
LOG
LOGIc
LONG
LOW
LOWLimit
LSB
MAIn
MAP
MATH
MATH1
MATH2
MATH3
MAXimum
MEAN
MEANDBM
MEANSTDdev
MEAS1
MEAS2
MEAS3
MEAS4
MEASUrement
MEDian
MEG
MESSage
METHod
600
MID
MID2
MINImum
MINMax
MINUSOne
MKDir
MODe
MONo
MORELimit
MOREThan
MSB
NAMe
NANd
NDUty
NEGAtive
NEGSynchwidth
NEWpass
NOISErej
NONe
NOR
NORMal
NOVershoot
NR_Pt
NTSc
NUMACq
NUMAVg
NUMEnv
NUMERic
NWIdth
ODD
OFF
OFFSET
OFFSETAdj
ON
ONCe
OR
OPTion
OUTside
OVERAll
OVERWrite
PAIred
PAL
PALEtte
PARity
PARTial
PASSWord
PATtern
PCX
PCXCOLOR
PDUty
PEAKDetect
PEAKHits
PERCent
PERIod
PERSistence
PHAse
601
PK2pk
PLUSOne
POInts
POLarity
PORT
PORTRait
POSition
POSITION1
POSITION2
POSITIVe
POVershoot
PREView
PRInt
PRObe
PROCessing
PT_Fmt
PT_Off
PULse
PWIdth
RATE1
RATE2
RATE3
RATE4
READFile
READY
RECAll
RECORDLength
RECORDSNap
RECORDSTart
RECTangular
REF
REF1
REF2
REF3
REF4
REFLevel
REGular
REJect
REM
REName
REPEt
RESET
RESETAll
RESUlt
RI
RIBinary
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
RIGHT3
RIGHT4
RIGHT5
RISe
RLE
RMDir
RMS
RP
602
RPBinary
RS232
RUN
RUNSAfter
RUNSTop
RUNT
SAMple
SAVe
SCAle
SCAN
SCROLLBAR
SCROLLTEXT
SECAm
SECdiv
SECOnds
SELect
SEQuence
SET
SETHold
SETLevel
SETTime
SETUp
SHORt
SHOW
SINX
SLEWRate
SLOpe
SLOWERthan
SNAp
SNAPShot
SOFTFlagging
SOUrce
SOURCE1
SOURCE2
SPECTral
SRIbinary
SRPbinary
STANdard
STARt
STATE
STATIstics
STDdev
STOP
STOPAfter
STOPBits
STORe
STYle
SYNc
SYStem
TARget
TBposition
TEKSecure
TEMPErature
TEMPLate
TEXt
THInkjet
603
THReshold
TIFf
TIMe
TITLe
TO
TOLerance
TRACk
TRIGAfter
TRIGBar
TRIGger
TRIGT
TRUe
TTL
TWEnty
TWOfifty
TYPe
UNITS
UNITString
UNLock
VALue
VARpersist
VBArs
VDELTA
VECtors
VERBose
VERTical
VIDeo
VOLts
V1STArttime
V1STOptime
V2STArttime
V2STOptime
WAVEform
WAVEFORMS
WAVFrm
WFId
WFMPre
WHEn
WIDth
WIThin
WRITEFile
X
XINcr
XMUlt
XOFf
XUNit
XY
XZEro
Y
YMUlt
YOFf
YT
YUNit
YZEro
ZERO
ZMUlt
604
ZOFf
ZONe
ZOOm
ZUNit
ZZEro
605
Appendix B: Interface Specifications
This appendix describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the oscilloscope. Normally, you
will not need this information to use the oscilloscope, but the information is useful when
connecting to controllers of unusual configuration.
GPIB Function Subsets
The oscilloscope supports many GPIB function subsets, as listed below. Some of the listings
describe subsets that the oscilloscope does not support.
•
SH1 (Source Handshake)
The oscilloscope can transmit multiline messages across the GPIB.
•
AH1 (Acceptor Handshake)
The oscilloscope can receive multiline messages across the GPIB.
•
T5 (Talker)
The oscilloscope becomes a talker when its talk address is sent with the ATN (Attention) line
asserted. It can send both response data and status information when responding to a serial
poll. It ceases to be a talker when the talk address if another device is sent with ATN
asserted. The oscilloscope has talk-only capability for hardcopy operation.
•
L4 (Listener)
The oscilloscope becomes a listener when its listen address is sent with the ATN (Attention)
line asserted. The oscilloscope does not have listen-only capability.
•
SR1 (Service Request)
The oscilloscope asserts an SRQ (Service Request) line to notify the controller when it
requires service.
•
RL1 (Remote/Local)
The oscilloscope responds to both the GTL (Go To Local) and LLO (Local Lock Out) interface
messages.
•
PP0 (Parallel Poll)
The oscilloscope has no parallel poll capability. It does not respond to the following interface
messages: PPC, PPD, PPE, and PPU. The oscilloscope does not send out a status message
when the ATN (Attention) and EOI (End or Identify) lines are asserted simultaneously.
•
DC1 (Device Clear)
The oscilloscope responds to the DCL (Device Clear) and, when made a listener, the SDC
(Selected Device Clear) interface messages.
•
DT1 (Device Trigger)
When acting as a listener, the oscilloscope responds to the GET (Group Execute Trigger)
interface message.
•
C0 (Controller)
The oscilloscope cannot control other devices.
•
E2 (Electrical)
The oscilloscope uses tristate buffers to provide optimal high-speed data transfer.
Interface Messages
606
Table B-1 shows the standard interface messages that are supported by the
oscilloscope.
Table B-1: TDS Family Oscilloscope Standard Interface Message
===============================================
Message
GPIB
------------------------------------DCL
Yes
GET
Yes
GTL
Yes
LLO
Yes
PPC
NO
PPD
NO
PPE
No
PPU
No
SDC
Yes
SPD
Yes
SPE
Yes
TCT
No
UNL
Yes
UNT
Yes
Listen Address Yes
Talk Address Yes
607
Appendix C: Factory Initialization Settings
The factory initialization settings provide you a known state for the oscilloscope.
Factory initialization sets values as shown in Table C-1.
Table C-1: Factory Initialization Settings
=============================================
Control
Changed by Factory Init to
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Acquire mode
Sample
Acquire repetitive signal
TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, & 700D:
ON (Enable ET)
Acquire stop after
RUN/STOP button only
Acquire # of averages
16
Acquire # of envelopes
10
Channel selection
Channel 1 on, all others off
Cursor H Bar 1 position
10% of graticule height
(-3.2 divs from the center)
Cursor H Bar 2 position
90% of the graticule height
(+3.2 divs from the center)
Cursor V Bar 1 position
10% of the record length
Cursor V Bar 2 position
90% of the record length
Cursor amplitude units
Base
Cursor function
Off
Cursor mode
Independent
Cursor time units
Seconds
Date and time
No change
Delay events,
TDS 400A: 1
triggerable after main
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, 700D: 2
Delay time,
TDS 400A: 10 ns
delayed runs after main
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, 700D: 16 ns
Delay time,
TDS 400A: 60 ns
delayed triggerable after main
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, 700D: 16 ns
Delay trigger average #
16
Delay trigger envelope #
10
Delayed, delay by
Delay by Time
Delayed edge trigger coupling
TDS 400A:
DC, Main Trigger
Delayed edge trigger level
0V
Delayed edge trigger slope
Rising
Delayed edge trigger source
Channel 1
Delayed, time base mode
Delayed Runs After Main
Deskew, Channel/Probe
0 seconds
Display clock
No Change
Display color - collision contrast TDS 644B, 684B, 700D: Off
Display color - map math colors TDS 644B, 684B, 700D: Color `Math'
Display color - map reference
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: Color `Ref'
colors
608
Display color - palette
Display color - palette colors
Display color - persistence
palette
Display format
Display graticule type
Display DPO persistence
Display DPO style
Display DPO varpersist
Display intensity - contrast
Display intensity - overall
Display intensity - text
Display intensity - waveform
Display interpolation filter
Display mode
Display style
Display trigger bar style
Display trigger "T"
Display variable persistence
Edge trigger coupling
Edge trigger level
Edge trigger slope
Edge trigger source
GPIB parameters
Hardcopy Format
Hardcopy Layout
Hardcopy Palette
Hardcopy Port
Horizontal - delay time/division
Horizontal - delay trigger
position
Horizontal - delay trigger record
length
Horizontal - FastFrame
Horizontal - FastFrame, frame
count
Horizontal - FastFrame, frame
length
Horizontal fit to screen
Horizontal main time/division
Horizontal main trigger position
Horizontal main trigger record
length
Horizontal time base
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: Normal
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: The colors of
each palette are reset to factory hue,
saturation, and lightness (HLS) values
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: Temperature
YT
Full
TDS 500D & 700D: Varpersist
TDS 500D & 700D: Vectors
TDS 500D & 700D: 500 e-3
TDS 400A, 500D, 620B, & 680B: 175%
TDS 510A: 150%
TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 620B, & 680B: 85%
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: 100%
TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 620B, & 680B: 60%
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700D: 100%
TDS 400A, 510A, 500D, 620B, & 680B: 75%
Sin(x)/x
Normal
Vectors
Short
On
500 ms
DC
0.0 V
Rising
Channel 1
No change
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
50 us
50%
500 points (10 divs)
TDS 500D & 700D: Off
TDS 500D & 700D: 2
500
Off
500 us
50%
500 points (10 divs)
Main only
609
Limit template
+V Limit
+H Limit
Limit template destination
Limit template source
Limit test sources
Limit Testing
Limit Testing
- hardcopy if condition met
Limit Testing
- ring bell if condition met
Logic pattern trigger Ch4 (Ax2)
input
Logic state trigger Ch4 (Ax2)
input
Logic trigger class
Logic trigger input (pattern and
state)
Logic trigger logic
(pattern and state)
Logic trigger pattern time
qualification
Lower limit
Upper limit
Logic trigger sources and levels
(Setup/Hold)
40 mdiv
40 mdiv
Ref1
Ch1
Ch1 compared to Ref1;
all others compared to none.
Off
Off
Off
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
X (do not care)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
Rising edge
TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D: Pattern
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
Channel 1 = H (high),
Channels 2 & 3 (Ax1) = X (do not care)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: AND
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
5 ns
5 ns
TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D:
Data Source = Channel 1 = 1.4 V
Clock Source = Channel 2 = 1.4 V
(Source levels are clipped to 1.2 V at the
default volts/division setting established by
Factory Init)
Logic trigger threshold
(all channels)
(pattern and state)
Logic trigger triggers when ...
(pattern and state)
Main trigger mode
Main trigger type
Math1 definition
Math1 extended processing
Math2 definition
Clock Edge = Rising
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
1.4 V
(clipped to 1.2 V at the default volts/division
setting when no 10X probe attached)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
Goes TRUE
Auto
Edge
Ch 1 + Ch 2
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
No extended processing
Ch 1 - Ch 2
(FFT of Ch 1 for instruments with Option
610
Math2 extended processing
Math3 definition
Math3 extended processing
Measure Delay edges
Measure Delay to
Measure Gating
Measure High Ref
Measure High-Low Setup
Measure Low Ref
Measure Mid Ref
Measure Mid2 Ref
Pulse glitch filter state
Pulse glitch trigger polarity
Pulse glitch width
Pulse runt high threshold
Pulse runt low threshold
Pulse runt trigger polarity
Pulse runt triggers when ...
Pulse slew rate delta time
Pulse slew rate polarity
Pulse slew rate thresholds
Upper
Lower
Pulse slew rate triggers when
Pulse timeout polarity
Pulse timeout time
Pulse trigger class
Pulse trigger level
Pulse trigger source
(Glitch, runt, and width)
Pulse width lower limit
Pulse width trigger polarity
Pulse width trigger when
Pulse width upper limit
Repetitive signal
RS-232 parameters
Saved setups
Saved waveforms
Stop after
Vertical bandwidth (all
channels)
Vertical coupling (all channels)
Vertical impedance
2F Advanced DSP Math)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
No extended processing
Inv of Ch 1
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
No extended processing
Both rising and forward searching
Channel 1 (Ch1)
Off
90% and 0 V (units)
Histogram
10% and 0 V (units)
50% and 0 V (units)
50% and 0 V (units)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D:
On (Accept glitch)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Positive
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 2.0 ns
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 1.2 V
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 0.8 V
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Positive
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Occurs
2.0 ns
Positive
Trig if faster than
1.80 V
800 mV
Trig if faster than
TDS 500D & 600B: Either
TDS 500D & 600B: 2.0 ns
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Glitch
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 0.0V
TDS 500D, 600B, & 700D:
Channel 1 (Ch1)
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 2.0 ns
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Positive
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Within
limits
TDS 510A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: 2.0 ns
TDS 500D & 700D: On
No change
No change
No change
R/S button
Full
DC
1 M-ohm
611
(termination) (all channels)
Vertical offset (all channels)
Vertical position (all channels)
Vertical volts per division
(all channels)
Zoom dual
Zoom dual offset
Zoom, dual window, selected
graticle
Zoom graticule
Zoom horizontal (all channels)
Zoom horizontal lock
Zoom horizontal position
(all channels)
Zoom mode
Zoom vertical (all channels)
Zoom vertical position
(all channels)
0V
0 divs.
100 mV per division
TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Off
TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Minimum
available
TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, & 700D: Upper
Upper
TDS 510A: 1.0X
TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, 700D: 2.0X
All
50% = 0.5 (the middle of the display)
Off
TDS 510A: 1.0X
TDS 400A, 500D, 600B, 700D: 2.0X
0 divisions
612
613
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement